Chemistry 0620 Past Papers Paper4

Cambridge
Chemistry (0620)
Past Papers
Assembled By Nesrine
Part I
Paper 4
(Variants 1,2,3)
2021-2016
(2023 Specimen
included)
For Examination from --------------------------------------1
2023
February/March 2021 Variant 2 ----------------------17
May/June 2021 Variant 1 ----------------------29
May/June 2021 Variant 2 ----------------------45
May/June 2021 Variant 3 ----------------------61
October/November 2021 Variant 1 ----------------------77
Chemistry 0620 Paper 4 Theory
October/November 2021 Variant 2 ----------------------89
October/November 2021 Variant 3 ---------------------105
February/March 2020 Variant 2 ---------------------121
May/June 2020 Variant 1 ---------------------133
May/June 2020 Variant 2 ---------------------145
May/June 2020 Variant 3 ---------------------161
Table of Contents

For Examination from -----------------------------------225
2020
May/June 2019 Variant 1 ---------------------261
May/June 2019 Variant 2 ---------------------277
May/June 2019 Variant 3 ---------------------293
May/June 2018 Variant 1 ---------------------369
May/June 2018 Variant 2 ---------------------381
May/June 2018 Variant 3 ---------------------393
May/June 2017 Variant 1 ---------------------469
May/June 2017 Variant 2 ---------------------485
May/June 2017 Variant 3 ---------------------501
May/June 2016 Variant 1 ---------------------577
May/June 2016 Variant 2 ---------------------593
May/June 2016 Variant 3 ---------------------605
For Examination from -----------------------------------665
2016
Cambridge IGCSE™
*0123456789*
CHEMISTRY 0620/04
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) For examination from 2023
SPECIMEN PAPER 1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
● The Periodic Table is printed in the question paper.
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
1/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

Assembled by Nesrine
2
1 Element X can undergo the following physical changes.
gaseous X
4
2
liquid X
3
1
solid X
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Name each of the numbered physical changes shown in Fig. 1.1.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
3 ........................................................................................................................................
4 ........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(ii) One difference between boiling and evaporation is the rate at which the processes occur.
State one other difference between boiling and evaporation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe the separation, arrangement and motion of particles of element X in the solid state.
separation .................................................................................................................................
arrangement .............................................................................................................................
motion .......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Element X is a Group III metal. It burns in air to form an oxide X2O3.
Write a symbol equation for this reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
-
>
© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23
2/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Magnesium, calcium and strontium are Group II elements.
(a) Complete Table 2.1 to show the electronic configuration of a calcium atom.
Table 2.1
shell 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

number of electrons
[1]
(b) Describe how the electronic configuration of a strontium atom is:
(i) similar to the electronic configuration of a calcium atom
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) different from the electronic configuration of a calcium atom.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calcium reacts with cold water to form two products:

• a colourless gas, P, which ‘pops’ with a lighted splint
• a weakly alkaline solution, Q, which turns milky when carbon dioxide is bubbled through it.
(i) Name gas P.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Identify the ion responsible for making solution Q alkaline.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest the pH of solution Q.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Write a symbol equation for the reaction of calcium with cold water.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23 [Turn over

3/684
-
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(d) Magnesium reacts with chlorine to form magnesium chloride, MgCl .
Magnesium chloride is an ionic compound.
(i) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram in Fig. 2.1 of the ions in magnesium chloride.
Show the charges on the ions.
......
Cl
......
Mg
......
Cl
Fig. 2.1 [3]
(ii) One physical property typical of ionic compounds, such as MgCl , is that they are soluble
in water.
Give two other physical properties that are typical of ionic compounds.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Aqueous silver nitrate is added to aqueous magnesium chloride.
A white precipitate forms.
Write an ionic equation for this reaction. Include state symbols.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

4/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 Copper is a transition element. It has variable oxidation states.
(a) State two other chemical properties of transition elements which make them different from
Group I elements.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) When copper(II
2
O + O2
(i) Identify the changes in oxidation numbers of copper and oxygen in this reaction.
Explain in terms of changes in oxidation numbers why this is a redox reaction.
change in oxidation number of copper: from …………… to ……………
change in oxidation number of oxygen: from …………… to ……………
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii)
reacts as shown in the equation.
2O
+ O2
3
.................................................... [3]

5/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(c) Copper metal is obtained when scrap iron is added to aqueous copper(II) sulfate.
(i) The reaction between iron and aqueous copper(II) sulfate is a displacement reaction.
State why this displacement reaction takes place.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a symbol equation for the reaction between iron and aqueous copper(II) sulfate.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) A displacement reaction is one method for obtaining copper metal from aqueous
copper(II) sulfate.
Identify another method for obtaining copper metal from aqueous copper(II) sulfate.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

6/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 Sulfuric acid has many uses.
(a) Sulfuric acid is a strong acid.
(i) Define the term acid.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Define the term strong acid.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Dilute sulfuric acid is used to make salts known as sulfates.
A method consisting of three steps is used to make zinc sulfate from zinc carbonate.
3 3
step 1 dilute sulfuric acid until
the reaction is complete.
step 2 Filter the mixture.
step 3 Heat the filtrate until a saturated solution forms and then allow it to crystallise.
(i) Suggest two observations which show that the reaction is complete in step 1.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State why it is important to add an excess of zinc carbonate in step 1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Define the term saturated solution.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Name another zinc compound which can be used to make zinc sulfate from dilute
sulfuric acid using this method.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Suggest why this method would not work to make barium sulfate from barium carbonate
and dilute sulfuric acid.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

7/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
3 3
(c) aqueous sodium hydroxide to a
conical flask. The student then added a few drops of methyl orange to the solution in the
conical flask.
Dilute sulfuric acid is then added from a burette to the conical flask. The volume of dilute
3
.
The reaction is shown by the equation.
2NaOH + H2SO4 → Na2SO4 + 2H2O
(i) State the colour of methyl orange in aqueous sodium hydroxide.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
3
(ii) using the following steps.
• Calculate the number of moles of aqueous sodium hydroxide added to the

conical flask.
.........................................................
• Calculate the number of moles of dilute sulfuric acid added from the burette.
.........................................................
3
• .
3
................................................
3
• .
3
....................................................
[4]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

8/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
BLANK PAGE

9/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
5 A student investigates the progress of the reaction between dilute hydrochloric acid, HCl, and an
excess of large pieces of marble, CaCO3, using the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1.
gas syringe
dilute
hydrochloric acid an excess of large
pieces of marble
Fig. 5.1
(a) A graph of the volume of gas produced against time is shown in Fig. 5.2.
150
100
volume of gas
produced / cm3
50
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
time / s
Fig. 5.2
(i) State how the shape of the graph shows that the rate of reaction decreases as the
reaction progresses.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest why the rate of reaction decreases as the reaction progresses.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Deduce the time at which the reaction finishes.
........................................................
© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

10/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(b) The experiment is repeated using the same mass of smaller pieces of marble.
All other conditions are kept the same.
Draw a line on the grid in Fig. 5.2 to show the progress of the reaction using the smaller pieces
of marble. [2]
(c) The original experiment is repeated at a higher temperature. All other conditions are kept
the same. The resulting increase in rate of reaction can be explained in terms of activation
energy and collisions between particles.
(i) Define the term activation energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the rate of a reaction increases when temperature increases, in terms of
activation energy and collisions between particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

11/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 Alkynes and alkenes are homologous series of unsaturated hydrocarbons.
(a) Complete Table 6.1 showing information about the first three alkynes.
Table 6.1
formula C 2H 2 C 3H 4
structure 3 2
–CH3
names ethyne but-1-yne
[2]
(b) Compounds in the same homologous series have the same general formula.
(i) Give two other characteristics of members of a homologous series.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Deduce the general formula of alkynes.
Use the information from Table 6.1 to help you.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Alkynes are unsaturated.
Describe a test for unsaturation.
test ....................................................................................................................................
result .................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Ethene and but-2-ene are alkenes.
(i) Draw the displayed formula of but-2-ene.
[2]
© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

12/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(ii) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show a molecule of ethene, CH2=CH2.
Show outer shell electrons only.
[2]
(d) Ethene can be converted to ethanoic acid by a two-stage process.
In stage one, ethene is converted to ethanol by catalytic addition.
C2H4 + H2 2H5OH
(i) Suggest why stage one is called an addition reaction.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A catalyst is used in stage one.
State one other condition that must be used.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State what must be reacted with ethanol to form ethanoic acid.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

13/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
7 Carboxylic acids can be converted into esters.
(a) Propanoic acid and methanol react to form an ester that has the molecular formula C4H8O2.
(i) Name this ester and draw its displayed formula.
name of ester ....................................................................................................................
displayed formula
[2]
(ii) Name another ester with the molecular formula C4H8O2.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Polyesters are polymers made from dicarboxylic acids.
(i) Name the other type of organic compound used in the formation of polyesters.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the type of polymerisation used in the manufacture of polyesters.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

14/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
The Periodic Table of Elements
Group
© UCLES 2020
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
3 4 atomic number 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li Be atomic symbol B C N O F Ne
lithium beryllium name boron carbon nitrogen oxygen fluorine neon
7 9 relative atomic mass 11 12 14 16 19 20
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
sodium magnesium aluminium silicon phosphorus sulfur chlorine argon
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
potassium calcium scandium titanium vanadium chromium manganese iron cobalt nickel copper zinc gallium germanium arsenic selenium bromine krypton
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
rubidium strontium yttrium zirconium niobium molybdenum technetium ruthenium rhodium palladium silver cadmium indium tin antimony tellurium iodine xenon
15
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
15/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/04/SP/23
lanthanoids
Cs Ba Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
caesium barium hafnium tantalum tungsten rhenium osmium iridium platinum gold mercury thallium lead bismuth polonium astatine radon
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Nh Fl Mc Lv Ts Og
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium nihonium flerovium moscovium livermorium tennessine oganesson
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
lanthanum cerium praseodymium neodymium promethium samarium europium gadolinium terbium dysprosium holmium erbium thulium ytterbium lutetium
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
actinium thorium protactinium uranium neptunium plutonium americium curium berkelium californium einsteinium fermium mendelevium nobelium lawrencium
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

16/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*1443180407*
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) February/March 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 03_0620_42/2RP
17/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

e
2
1 The table shows the numbers of protons, neutrons and electrons in particles A to I.
particle protons neutrons electrons

A
By 1 0 0
⑭
B 6 6 6
C 6 8 6
⑲
D 10 10 10
E 16 16 18
BG
F 17 18 17
18 22 18
H
t 19 20 19
AI 20 20 18
Answer the following questions about particles A to I. Each letter may be used once, more than
once or not at all.
(a) State which of the particles A to I:
(i) is an anion ................................................ [1]
(ii) are cations .................... and .................... [2]
(iii) are noble gas atoms .................... and .................... [2]
(iv) is a halogen atom ................................................ [1]
(v) is a Group I atom ................................................ [1]
(vi) have the same nucleon number .................... and .................... [1]
(vii) causes acidity in aqueous solutions ................................................ [1]
(viii)
(b) Explain why B and C are isotopes of the same element.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/F/M/21

18/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 The elements shown are gases at room temperature and pressure.
hydrogen
nitrogen
oxygen
chlorine
(a) State which one of these gases is green.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The gases shown exist as diatomic molecules.
State the name of another element which has diatomic molecules and is a gas at room
temperature and pressure.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c)
(i)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain your answer.
gas ......................................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Nitrogen, oxygen and other substances are found in clean, dry air.
(i) State the percentage of nitrogen in clean, dry air.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Other than nitrogen and oxygen, identify another element found in clean, dry air.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Identify a compound found in clean, dry air.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Nitrogen and oxygen can be separated from liquid air.
State the name of this process.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/F/M/21 [Turn over

19/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 This question is about ammonia.
(a) Nitrogen reacts with hydrogen to form ammonia in an industrial process.
N2(g) + 3H2(g) 2NH3(g)
(i) Name this industrial process.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the meaning of the symbol .
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the conditions used in this industrial process. Include units.
temperature .....................................................
pressure ...........................................................
[2]
(iv) Name the catalyst used in this industrial process.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) If the pressure is increased, the yield of ammonia increases.
Explain why, in terms of equilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(vi) If the temperature is increased, the rate of reaction increases.
Explain why, in terms of particles.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Ammonia reacts with sulfuric acid to make a compound which is used as a fertiliser.
Write the chemical equation for the reaction between ammonia and sulfuric acid.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/F/M/21

20/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
4 A student wanted to make some zinc chloride crystals.
The student followed the procedure shown.
step 1 Add excess zinc powder to dilute hydrochloric acid to form aqueous zinc chloride.
step 2 Remove unreacted zinc powder from the aqueous zinc chloride.
step 3 Heat the solution until it is saturated.
step 4 Allow the saturated solution to cool and remove the crystals that form.
(a) Write the equation for the reaction in step 1. Include state symbols.
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Explain why excess zinc powder is added in step 1.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Suggest how unreacted zinc powder is removed in step 2.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) A saturated solution is formed in step 3.
Suggest what is meant by the term saturated solution.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Explain why crystals form as the solution cools in step 4.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) Name two zinc compounds which react with dilute hydrochloric acid to form zinc chloride.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(g) If excess calcium metal is used instead of excess zinc powder in step 1, pure calcium chloride
crystals do not form.
Explain why.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

21/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(h) Some salts can be made by titration.
In a titration experiment, 20.0 cm3 of aqueous sodium hydroxide reacts exactly with 25.0 cm3 of
0.100 mol / dm3 dilute sulfuric acid to make sodium sulfate.
2NaOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq) → Na2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(l)
(i) Circle the name of the type of reaction that takes place.
decomposition neutralisation precipitation reduction

[1]
(ii) Calculate the concentration of the aqueous sodium hydroxide in g / dm3 using the following
steps.
● Calculate the number of moles of dilute sulfuric acid used.
.............................. mol
● Determine the number of moles of sodium hydroxide which react with the dilute
sulfuric acid.
.............................. mol
● Calculate the concentration of the aqueous sodium hydroxide in mol / dm3.
.............................. mol / dm3
● Calculate the concentration of the aqueous sodium hydroxide in g / dm3.
.............................. g / dm3
[5]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/F/M/21

22/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
QUESTION 5 STARTS ON THE NEXT PAGE.

23/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 The table shows the names or structures of organic compounds P to U.
P Q R
H H H
H C C C H propanoic acid but-1-ene
H H H
S T U
H H H
propan-1-ol methyl butanoate C C C H
H H
(a) Give the letters of the organic compounds, P to U, that are unsaturated hydrocarbons.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Describe the test for an unsaturated hydrocarbon.
test .............................................................................................................................................
observations ..............................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) But-1-ene is an unbranched molecule.
(i) Name the unbranched isomer of but-1-ene.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of a branched isomer of but-1-ene. Show all of the atoms and all of the
bonds.
[1]
(d) Dodecane is an alkane with 12 carbon atoms. Dodecane can be cracked.
(i) Write the formula of dodecane.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give the letters of all the organic compounds, P to U, that can be formed when dodecane
is cracked.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/F/M/21

24/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(e) Name the reagent and suggest the conditions needed to convert organic compound U into
organic compound S.
reagent ......................................................................................................................................
conditions ..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(f) Organic compound S can be converted to organic compound Q

reagent.
(i) Name the type of chemical change that happens to organic compound S.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) S.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(g) Organic compound T is made by reacting two compounds together.
(i) Name the homologous series that organic compound T belongs to.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the two compounds which react together to make organic compound T.
Draw the structures of each compound you have named. Show all of the atoms and all of
the bonds.
name ...................................................................................................................................
structure
name ...................................................................................................................................
structure
[4]
(iii) Deduce the molecular formula of organic compound T.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 20]

25/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 Polymers are large molecules built up from small molecules.
(a) State the name given to the small molecules from which polymers are made.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The formula of a polymer is shown.
H H
C C
CH3 CH3 n
(i) Draw the structure of the small molecule from which this polymer is made. Show all of the
atoms and all of the bonds.
[2]
(ii) State the type of polymerisation used to make this polymer.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Three amino acids are shown. They combine to form part of a natural polymer.
H 2N COOH H 2N COOH H 2N COOH
(i) Name the type of natural polymer formed when amino acids combine.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the diagram to show part of the structure of the natural polymer that forms when
these three amino acids combine. Show all of the bonds in the linkages.
[3]
(iii) Name the type of chemical reaction that takes place when this natural polymer is converted
back to amino acids.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/F/M/21

26/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/F/M/21

27/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2021
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
28/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/F/M/21
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
Fr Ra Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Ds Rg Cn Fl Lv
francium radium rutherfordium dubnium seaborgium bohrium hassium meitnerium darmstadtium roentgenium copernicium flerovium livermorium
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*0998164444*
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 06_0620_41/3RP
29/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Give the name of the process that is used:
(a) to produce ammonia from nitrogen
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) to separate nitrogen from liquid air
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) to produce bromine from molten lead(II) bromide
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) to separate an undissolved solid from an aqueous solution
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) to produce amino acids from proteins
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) to separate a mixture of amino acids.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/M/J/21

30/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Complete the table to:
● deduce the number of protons, electrons and neutrons in the magnesium atom and copper ion
shown
● identify the atom or ion represented by the final row.
number of number of number of

protons electrons neutrons
12Mg
25
12
29Cu
65 2+
36
17 18 20
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/M/J/21 [Turn over

31/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 Potassium reacts with chlorine to form potassium chloride, KCl.
(a) Write a chemical equation for this reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Potassium chloride is an ionic compound.
Complete the diagram to show the electron arrangement in the outer shells of the ions present
in potassium chloride.
Give the charges on both ions.
........ ........
K Cl
[3]
(c) Molten potassium chloride undergoes electrolysis.
(i) State what is meant by the term electrolysis.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name the products formed at the positive electrode (anode) and negative electrode
(cathode) when molten potassium chloride undergoes electrolysis.
anode ..................................................................................................................................
cathode ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Concentrated aqueous potassium chloride undergoes electrolysis.
(i) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction at the negative electrode (cathode).
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name the product formed at the positive electrode (anode).
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the potassium compound that remains in the solution after electrolysis.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/M/J/21

32/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(e) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of
chlorine, Cl 2.
Show the outer electrons only.
Cl Cl
[1]
(f) The melting points and boiling points of chlorine and potassium chloride are shown.
melting point boiling point

/ C / C
chlorine –101 –35
potassium chloride 770 1500
(i) Deduce the physical state of chlorine at –75 C. Use the data in the table to explain your
answer.
physical state ......................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Explain, in terms of structure and bonding, why potassium chloride has a much higher
melting point than chlorine.
Your answer should refer to the:

● types of particle held together by the forces of attraction
● types of forces of attraction between particles
● relative strength of the forces of attraction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 19]

33/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 Dinitrogen tetroxide, N2O4, decomposes into nitrogen dioxide, NO2. The reaction is reversible.
N2O4(g) 2NO2(g)
colourless gas brown gas
A gas syringe containing a mixture of dinitrogen tetroxide and nitrogen dioxide gases was sealed
and heated. After reaching equilibrium the mixture was a pale brown colour.
mixture of dinitrogen tetroxide

and nitrogen dioxide
end sealed plunger
(a) State what is meant by the term equilibrium.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The plunger of the gas syringe is pushed in. The temperature does not change. The mixture
initially turns darker brown. After a few seconds the mixture turns lighter brown because the
equilibrium shifts to the left.
N2O4(g) 2NO2(g)
colourless gas brown gas
(i) Explain why the mixture initially turns darker brown.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the position of equilibrium shifts to the left.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The forward reaction is endothermic.
(i) State what happens to the position of equilibrium when the temperature of the mixture is
increased.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what happens to the rate of the forward reaction and the rate of the backward
reaction when the temperature of the mixture is increased.
rate of the forward reaction .................................................................................................
rate of the backward reaction .............................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/M/J/21

34/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
5 This question is about salts.
(a) Salts that are insoluble in water are made by precipitation.
● Lead(II) iodide, PbI2, is insoluble in water.

● All nitrates are soluble in water.
● All sodium salts are soluble in water.
You are provided with solid lead(II) nitrate, Pb(NO3)2, and solid sodium iodide, NaI.
Describe how you would make a pure sample of lead(II) iodide by precipitation.
Your answer should include:

● practical details
● a chemical equation for the precipitation reaction.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) Nitrates decompose when heated.
(i)
Describe a test for oxygen.
test ......................................................................................................................................
observations .......................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Complete the equation for the decomposition of hydrated zinc nitrate.
2Zn(NO3)2•6H2O → .....ZnO + .....NO2 + O2 + .....H2O [2]

35/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(c) Some sulfates are hydrated.
When hydrated sodium sulfate crystals, Na2SO4•xH2
Na2SO4•xH2O(s) → Na2SO4(s) + xH2O(g)
A student carries out an experiment to determine the value of x in Na2SO4•xH2O.
step 1 Hydrated sodium sulfate crystals are weighed.
step 2 The hydrated sodium sulfate crystals are then heated.
step 3 The remaining solid is weighed.
(i)
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/M/J/21

36/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(ii) In an experiment, 1.61 g of Na2SO4•xH2

mass of Na2SO4 remaining is 0.71 g.
[Mr: Na2SO4,142; H2O,18]
Determine the value of x using the following steps.
● Calculate the number of moles of Na2SO4 remaining.
.............................. mol
● Calculate the mass of H2O given off.
.............................. g
● Calculate the number of moles of H2O given off.
.............................. mol
● Determine the value of x.
x = ..............................
[4]
[Total: 15]

37/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 This question is about iron.
(a) Iron is extracted from its main ore in a blast furnace.
waste gases
raw materials:
coke,
iron ore,
limestone
A
B
molten iron
(i) Name the main ore of iron used in the blast furnace.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the substance that enters the blast furnace at A.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the substance that leaves the blast furnace at B.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Give two reasons for using coke in the blast furnace.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Another ore of iron is iron pyrites, FeS2. Iron pyrites contains the positive ion, Fe2+.
Deduce the formula of the negative ion in FeS2.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/M/J/21

38/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(c) Iron is a transition element.
A list of properties of iron is shown.
● Iron is a good conductor of electricity.

● Iron forms soluble salts.
● Iron forms coloured compounds.
● Iron has variable oxidation states.
● Iron acts as a catalyst.
● Iron forms a basic oxide.
(i) Give two
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Give two properties from the list in which iron is similar to Group I elements.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Steel consists mainly of iron.
Iron forms rust when it reacts with water and oxygen.
Magnesium blocks can be attached to the bottom of steel boats. The magnesium does not
completely cover the steel.
steel boat
water containing magnesium

dissolved oxygen blocks
(i) Explain how the magnesium blocks prevent iron from rusting.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

39/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
(ii) Explain why replacing the magnesium blocks with copper blocks will not prevent the
bottom of the boat from rusting.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/M/J/21

40/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
7 Many organic compounds contain carbon, hydrogen and oxygen only.
(a) An organic compound V has the following composition by mass.
C, 48.65%; H, 8.11%; O, 43.24%
Calculate the empirical formula of compound V.
empirical formula = .............................. [3]
(b) Compound W has the empirical formula CH4O and a relative molecular mass of 32.
Calculate the molecular formula of compound W.
molecular formula = .............................. [1]
(c) Compounds X and Y have the same general formula.
X and Y are both carboxylic acids.
Compound X has the molecular formula C2H4O2.
Compound Y has the molecular formula C4H8O2.
(i) Deduce the general formula of compounds X and Y.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

41/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
(ii) Draw the structure of compound Y. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
Name compound Y.
name ...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(iii) Give the name used to describe a ‘family’ of similar compounds with the same general
formula, similar chemical properties and the same functional group.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Propene is an unsaturated hydrocarbon. The formula of propene is shown.
CH3CH=CH2
(i) State the colour change observed when propene is added to aqueous bromine.
from ............................................................. to ............................................................ [1]
(ii) Propene can be produced by cracking long chain alkanes.
Pentadecane, C15H32, is cracked to produce an alkane and propene in a 1 : 2 molar ratio.
Complete the chemical equation for this reaction.
C15H32 → ....................................... + ....................................... [2]
(iii) Propene can be converted into poly(propene).
Name the type of polymerisation that occurs when propene is converted into poly(propene).
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Complete the diagram to show a section of poly(propene).
C C C C
[2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/M/J/21

42/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/M/J/21

43/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2021
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
44/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/M/J/21
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*9904169354*
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 06_0620_42/2RP
45/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The symbols of the elements of Period 3 of the Periodic Table are shown.
Answer the following questions about these elements.

Each element may be used once, more than once or not at all.
Write the symbol of an element which:
(a) is malleable
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) has only two electrons in its outermost shell
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) forms an oxide which leads to acid rain
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) forms an ion with a 2– charge
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) is extracted from an ore called bauxite
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) does not form an oxide
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(g) forms an oxide with a macromolecular structure
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(h) forms an amphoteric oxide
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(i) exists as diatomic molecules
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(j) forms a binary compound with hydrogen that is a strong acid.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/M/J/21

46/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Silver has an atomic number of 47.
(a) Naturally occurring atoms of silver are 107Ag and 109Ag.
(i)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the table to show the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in each atom
and ion of silver shown.
47Ag 47Ag
107 109 +
protons
neutrons
electrons
[3]
(iii)
Relative atomic mass is the ............................... mass of naturally occurring atoms
of an element on a scale where the ............................... atom has a mass of exactly
............................... units.
[3]
(iv) A sample of silver has a relative atomic mass of 108.0.
Deduce the percentage of 107Ag present in this sample of silver.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Silver nitrate is a salt of silver made by reacting silver oxide with an acid.
Write the formula of the acid which reacts with silver oxide to form silver nitrate.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

47/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(c) Aqueous silver nitrate is a colourless solution containing Ag+(aq) ions.
(i) Describe what is seen when aqueous silver nitrate is added to aqueous sodium iodide,
NaI(aq).
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the ionic equation for the reaction between aqueous silver nitrate and aqueous
sodium iodide.
Include state symbols.
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) In the positive test for aqueous nitrate ions, aqueous sodium hydroxide and one other substance
are warmed with the nitrate ions.
Name this other substance and the gas formed.
name of substance ....................................................................................................................
name of gas ...............................................................................................................................

[2]
(e) When silver nitrate is exposed to sunlight, silver is formed.
Name the type of reaction which needs light to make it happen.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) Members of one homologous series only react with chlorine in the presence of sunlight.
(i) Name a member of this homologous series.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name two products that form when the compound in (i) reacts with chlorine.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/M/J/21

48/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 Sodium hydrogencarbonate is found in baking powder.
When sodium hydrogencarbonate is heated it forms three products.
2NaHCO3 → Na2CO3 + H2O + CO2
(a) Name the type of reaction that takes place when sodium hydrogencarbonate reacts in this way.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the volume of carbon dioxide formed at room temperature and pressure when 12.6 g
of NaHCO3 is heated using the following steps:
● determine the mass of one mole of NaHCO3
.............................. g
● calculate the number of moles of NaHCO3 used
.............................. moles
● determine the number of moles of carbon dioxide formed
.............................. moles
● calculate the volume of carbon dioxide formed at room temperature and pressure.
.............................. dm3
[4]
(c) Limewater is aqueous calcium hydroxide. Carbon dioxide turns limewater milky because a
white precipitate forms.
Write the formula of:
● calcium hydroxide ...............................................................................................................
● the white precipitate that forms when limewater turns milky. ..............................................
[2]
[Total: 7]

49/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 A student carries out an electrolysis experiment using the apparatus shown.
wire
+ – carbon electrodes
dilute aqueous
sodium chloride
The student uses dilute aqueous sodium chloride.
(a) State the name given to any solution which undergoes electrolysis.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Hydroxide ions are discharged at the anode.
(i) Complete the ionic half-equation for this reaction.
..........OH–(aq) → ........................... + O2(g) + 4e– [2]
(ii) Explain how the ionic half-equation shows the hydroxide ions are being oxidised.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Describe what the student observes at the cathode.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction at the cathode.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/M/J/21

50/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(e) The student repeats the experiment using concentrated aqueous sodium chloride.
(i) Describe what the student observes at:
● the cathode ..................................................................................................................
● the anode. ....................................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) The student added litmus to the solution after the electrolysis of concentrated aqueous
sodium chloride.
State the colour seen in the solution. Give a reason for your answer.
colour of solution ................................................................................................................
reason .................................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) Carbon electrodes are used because they are inert.
State another element that can be used instead of carbon.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 12]

51/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 This question is about compounds of nitrogen.
(a) Nitrogen reacts with lithium to form lithium nitride, Li3N.
(i) Write the chemical equation for the reaction between lithium and nitrogen.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Lithium nitride is ionically bonded.
Complete the diagram to show the electronic structure of the nitride ion.
Show the charge on the nitride ion.
........
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/M/J/21

52/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(b) 3 .
(i) The chemical equation can be represented as shown.
N≡N + 3 F–F ! 2 F–N–F

F
Some bond energies are shown in the table.
bond bond energy in kJ / mol

945
160
300
following steps:
● energy taken in to break bonds
.............................. kJ
● energy released when bonds are formed
.............................. kJ
● energy change during the reaction.
.............................. kJ / mol
[3]
(ii) Use your answer to (i) to deduce whether this reaction is endothermic or exothermic.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

53/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(iii) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of
3.
Show outer electrons only.
F N F
[3]
(c) Lithium nitride melts at 813 C.
Explain in terms of attractive forces why lithium nitride has a much higher melting point than
In your answer refer to the types of attractive forces between particles and their relative
strengths.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Ammonium nitrate, NH4NO3, is a compound of nitrogen.
(i) Calculate the percentage by mass of nitrogen in ammonium nitrate.
percentage by mass of nitrogen = .............................. [2]
(ii) State a use of ammonium nitrate in agriculture.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of a compound that will displace ammonia from ammonium nitrate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/M/J/21

54/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(e) Ammonia is a base which forms a weakly alkaline solution when dissolved in water.
(i) base.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the pH of aqueous ammonia.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 20]

55/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 Molecules A and B can form condensation polymers.
A B
HO OH HOOC COOH
(a) Each molecule has two identical functional groups.
(i) Name the functional group in B.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the part of the structure of the synthetic polymer that would form when two molecules
of A and two molecules of B combine. Show all of the bonds in the linkages.
[3]
(iii) Name the other product formed when molecules of A and B undergo polymerisation.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Molecule A is a simple sugar unit which can be made by hydrolysis of complex carbohydrates.
(i) Draw part of the complex carbohydrate that could be hydrolysed to make molecules of A.
Include one linkage and show all of the bonds in the linkage.
[1]
(ii) State two sets of conditions which could be used to hydrolyse the complex carbohydrate
to form A.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Name the technique used to identify the individual sugar units made by the hydrolysis of a
complex carbohydrate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/M/J/21

56/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(c) Ethanol can be made from the simple sugar glucose, C6H12O6.
(i) State the name of this process.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the chemical equation for this reaction.
C6H12O6 → [2]
[Total: 12]

57/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/M/J/21

58/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/M/J/21

59/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2021
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
60/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/M/J/21
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*8479859252*
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 06_0620_43/3RP
61/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
(a) to produce large molecules from monomers
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) to separate oxygen from liquid air
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) to make ethanol from glucose
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) to separate water from aqueous sodium chloride
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) to produce aluminium from aluminium oxide in molten cryolite
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) to separate the products of hydrolysis of long chain carbohydrates
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(g) to separate an aqueous solution from an undissolved solid.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/M/J/21

62/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Complete the table to:
● deduce the number of protons, electrons and neutrons in the boron atom and chloride ion
shown
● identify the atom or ion represented by the final row.

formula
5B
11
5
17Cl
35 –
17
24 21 30
[Total: 5]

63/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(a) Write a chemical equation for this reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b)
Complete the diagram to show the electron arrangement in the outer shells of the ions present
Give the charges on both ions.
........ ........
Na F
[3]
(c)
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
anode ..................................................................................................................................
cathode ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(d)
(i)
anode ..................................................................................................................................
cathode ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/M/J/21

64/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(e) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of
2.
Show the outer electrons only.
F F
[1]
(f)
melting point boiling point

/ C / C
–220 –188
993 1695
(i) C. Use the data in the table to explain your

answer.
physical state ......................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
Your answer should refer to the:

● types of particle held together by the forces of attraction
● types of forces of attraction between particles
● relative strength of the forces of attraction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 18]

65/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 Hydrogen iodide, HI, decomposes into iodine and hydrogen. The reaction is reversible.
2HI I2 2
colourless gas purple gas colourless gas
A gas syringe containing a mixture of hydrogen iodide, iodine and hydrogen gases was sealed.
After reaching equilibrium the mixture was a pale purple colour.
equilibrium mixture of hydrogen iodide,

iodine and hydrogen
end sealed plunger
(a) State what is meant by the term equilibrium.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The plunger of the gas syringe is pushed in. The position of equilibrium does not change. The
colour of the gaseous mixture turns darker purple.
The temperature remains constant.
2HI I2 2
colourless gas purple gas colourless gas
(i) Explain why the position of equilibrium does not change.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest why the colour of the gaseous mixture turns darker purple even though the
position of equilibrium does not change.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The forward reaction is endothermic.
(i) State what happens to the position of equilibrium when the temperature is decreased.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/M/J/21

66/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(ii) State what happens to the rate of the forward reaction and the rate of the backward
reaction when the temperature of the mixture is decreased.

[2]
[Total: 7]

67/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 This question is about salts.
(a) Salts that are soluble in water can be made by the reaction between insoluble carbonates and
dilute acids. Zinc sulfate is soluble in water.
You are provided with solid zinc carbonate, ZnCO3, and dilute sulfuric acid, H2SO4.
Describe how you would make a pure sample of zinc sulfate crystals.

● practical details
● how you would make sure that all the dilute sulfuric acid has reacted
● a chemical equation for the reaction.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) Some sulfates decompose when heated.
II
(i) Describe a test for sulfur dioxide.
test ......................................................................................................................................
observations .......................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) II
4 •7H2O → 2 O3 2 3 2 O [2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/M/J/21

68/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(c) Some chlorides are hydrated.
When hydrated barium chloride crystals, BaCl 2•xH2
BaCl 2•xH2 → BaCl 2 xH2
A student carries out an experiment to determine the value of x in BaCl 2•xH2O.
step 1 Hydrated barium chloride crystals are weighed.
step 2 The hydrated barium chloride crystals are then heated.
step 3 The remaining solid is weighed.
(i)
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) In an experiment, 4.88 g of BaCl 2•xH2

of BaCl 2 remaining is 4.16 g.
[Mr: BaCl 2, 208; H2O, 18]
● Calculate the number of moles of BaCl 2 remaining.
.............................. mol
.............................. g
● Calculate the number of moles of H2O given off.
.............................. mol
x = ..............................
[4]
[Total: 15]

69/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 This question is about metals.
(a) Iron is extracted from its main ore in a blast furnace.
waste gases
air air
slag
A
(i) Coke and iron ore are added at the top of the blast furnace.
other substance that is added at the top of the blast furnace.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) III 2 O3.
III
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Temperatures inside a blast furnace can reach 2000 C.
two substances that react together, in the blast furnace, to produce this high
temperature.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) two waste gases that leave the blast furnace.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/M/J/21

70/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(b) Zinc is extracted from zinc blende.
(i)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) When zinc is extracted, it is formed as a gas.
The gaseous zinc is then converted into molten zinc.
State the name of this physical change.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c)
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Copper has the following properties.
● It has a high melting point.

● It has a high density.
● It is a good conductor of electricity.
● It has variable oxidation states.
● It forms a basic oxide.
● It forms soluble salts.
(i) Give two
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Give two properties from the list in which copper is similar to Group I elements.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]

71/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
7 Many organic compounds contain carbon, hydrogen and oxygen only.
(a) An organic compound R has the following composition by mass.
C, 69.77%; H, 11.63%; O, 18.60%
Calculate the empirical formula of compound R.
(b) Compound S has the empirical formula CH2O and a relative molecular mass of 60.
Calculate the molecular formula of compound S.
(c) Compounds T and V have the same molecular formula, C3H6O2.
● Compound T is an ester.
● Compound V contains a –COOH functional group.
(i)
structures.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) V is a member of.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/M/J/21

72/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(iii) Draw a structure of compound T. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
T.
name ...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(iv) Draw the structure of compound V. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
V.
name ...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Ethanol can be produced from long chain alkanes such as decane, C10H22, in a two-step
process.
step 1 step 2
decane ethene ethanol
● name the type of chemical reaction that occurs

● write a chemical equation.
step 1: decane to ethene
type of reaction ..........................................................................................................................
chemical equation ......................................................................................................................
step 2: ethene to ethanol
type of reaction ..........................................................................................................................

[4]
[Total: 15]

73/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/M/J/21

74/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/M/J/21

75/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2021
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
76/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/M/J/21
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*4684088012*
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) October/November 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 12 pages.
IB21 11_0620_41/2RP
77/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Some elements are shown in the order they appear in the reactivity series. The most reactive
element is at the top.
sodium
calcium
magnesium
aluminium
zinc
iron
hydrogen
copper
(a) Answer the questions using the list of elements. Each element may be used once, more than
once or not at all.
Identify:
(i) a non-metal
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) a metal which is stored under oil
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) the main component of steel
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) a metal with three electrons in the outer shell of its atoms
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) a metal found in brass
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) a metal that forms chlorides of the type XCl 2 and XCl 3.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Name the main ores of:
(i) zinc ............................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) aluminium. .................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) In an experiment, a sample of aluminium appeared less reactive than expected.
Explain why.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/O/N/21

78/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(d) Name two metals from the list which are extracted by reduction of their ores using carbon.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) When zinc granules are added to aqueous copper(II) sulfate, a reaction occurs. During the
reaction, a red-pink solid is formed and the solution becomes colourless.
(i) Name the red-pink solid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the colourless solution.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain, in terms of particles, why the rate of this reaction increases when the temperature
is increased.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iv) Suggest two other ways of increasing the rate of this reaction.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/O/N/21 [Turn over

79/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
2 This question is about copper and its compounds.
(a) 63
Cu and 65Cu.
(i)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The atomic number of copper is 29.
Complete the table to show the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in the particles
of copper shown.
63
Cu 65
Cu2+
protons
neutrons
electrons
[3]
(iii) Relative atomic mass is the average mass of naturally occurring atoms of an element.
The percentage of the naturally occurring atoms in a sample of copper is shown.
63
Cu 65
Cu
70% 30%
Deduce the relative atomic mass of copper in this sample.
Give your answer to one decimal place.
relative atomic mass = .............................. [2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/O/N/21

80/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(b) Anhydrous copper(II) sulfate is used to test for the presence of water. When this test is positive,
hydrated copper(II) sulfate is formed.
(i) State the colour change seen during this test.
from ............................................................. to ............................................................ [2]
(ii) Complete the chemical equation to show the reaction that takes place.
CuSO4 + ........................ CuSO4•5H2O [1]
(iii) State how hydrated copper(II) sulfate can be turned back into anhydrous copper(II) sulfate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Describe a test for pure water.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Aqueous copper(II) sulfate contains Cu2+(aq) ions.
(i) Describe what is seen when aqueous copper(II) sulfate is added to aqueous
sodium hydroxide, NaOH(aq).
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the ionic equation for the reaction between aqueous copper(II) sulfate and aqueous
sodium hydroxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

81/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(d) When solid copper(II) nitrate is heated copper(II) oxide, nitrogen dioxide and oxygen are
formed.
2Cu(NO3)2 → 2CuO + 4NO2 + O2
Calculate the volume of nitrogen dioxide formed at room temperature and pressure when 4.7 g
of Cu(NO3)2 is heated.
Use the following steps:
● calculate the mass of one mole of Cu(NO3)2
.............................. g
● calculate the number of moles of Cu(NO3)2 used
.............................. moles
● determine the number of moles of nitrogen dioxide formed
.............................. moles
● calculate the volume of nitrogen dioxide formed at room temperature and pressure.
.............................. dm3
[4]
(e) Write the chemical equation to show the action of heat on sodium nitrate, NaNO3.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 22]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/O/N/21

82/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
3 This question is about electrolysis.
Concentrated hydrochloric acid is electrolysed using the apparatus shown.
wire
+ – carbon electrodes
concentrated
hydrochloric acid
(a) Chloride ions are discharged at the anode.
(i) Complete the ionic half-equation for this reaction.
..........Cl –(aq) → ..........(g) + ..........e– [2]
(ii) State whether oxidation or reduction takes place. Explain your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe what is seen at the cathode.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction at the cathode.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) The pH of the electrolyte is measured throughout the experiment.
(i) Suggest the pH of the electrolyte at the beginning of the experiment.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State how the pH changes, if at all, during the experiment.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

83/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(e) The electrolysis is repeated using molten lead(II) bromide.
Describe what is seen at the:
● ...............................................................................................................................
● .................................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) State two properties of graphite (carbon) which make it suitable for use as an electrode.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/O/N/21

84/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
4 Chalcopyrite, FeCuS2, is used in the manufacture of sulfuric acid in the Contact process.
(a)
sulfur dioxide, SO2, iron(III) oxide and copper(II) oxide.
Complete the chemical equation for the reaction of FeCuS2 with oxygen.
4FeCuS2 + 13O2 → ................. + ................. + ................. [2]
(b) Sulfur dioxide is then converted to sulfur trioxide.
2SO2 + O2 2SO3
The reaction is exothermic. It is also an equilibrium.
(i) State two features of an equilibrium.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the temperature and pressure used in this reaction.

Include units.
● .................................................................................................................
● .......................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Name the catalyst used.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Explain why a catalyst is used.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Describe and explain, in terms of equilibrium, what happens when the temperature is
increased.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Concentrated sulfuric acid is a dehydrating agent.
When glucose is dehydrated, carbon and one other product are formed.
Complete the equation to show the dehydration of glucose, C6H12O6.
C6H12O6 → ...........C + ..................... [2]
[Total: 12]

85/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
5 Alkenes and carboxylic acids are both families of similar compounds with similar chemical properties.
(a) State the term used for a ‘family’ of similar compounds.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State the general formula of alkenes.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The structure of but-2-ene is shown.
H H H
H C C C C H
H H H
(i) But-2-ene reacts with aqueous bromine in an addition reaction.
Describe the colour change seen when but-2-ene is added to aqueous bromine.
from ............................................................. to ............................................................ [1]
(ii) State what is meant by the term addition reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write the chemical equation for the reaction between but-2-ene and bromine.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) But-2-ene forms a polymer.
Suggest the name of the polymer formed from but-2-ene.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Name and draw a structural isomer of but-2-ene.
Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
name ...................................................................................................................................
structure
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/O/N/21

86/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(d) Butanoic acid, CH3CH2CH2COOH, is a carboxylic acid.
(i) Deduce the empirical formula of butanoic acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the chemical equation for the reaction of butanoic acid and sodium carbonate,
Na2CO3.
2CH3CH2CH2COOH + Na2CO3 → .................................... + ............... + ............... [2]
(iii) Butanoic acid reacts with methanol to form an organic compound and water.
● Name the organic compound formed.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
● Draw the structure of the organic compound formed.
[2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2021 0620/41/O/N/21

87/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2021
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
88/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/O/N/21
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*8417627571*
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 11_0620_42/3RP
89/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 This question is about states of matter.
(a) Complete the table, using ticks ( ) and crosses ( ), to describe the properties of gases, liquids
and solids.
particles particles have particles are

state of matter
are touching random movement regularly arranged
gas
liquid
solid
[3]
(b) Substances can change state.
(i) Boiling and evaporation are two ways in which a liquid changes into a gas.
Describe two
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Name the change of state when:
● a gas becomes a liquid ................................................................................................
● a solid becomes a gas. ................................................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/O/N/21

90/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(c) A substance boils at temperature X and melts at temperature Y.
Complete the graph to show the change in temperature over time as the substance cools from
temperature A to temperature B.
temperature
time
[2]
(d) A solution is a mixture of a solute and a solvent.
(i) Name the process when a solid substance mixes with a solvent to form a solution.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the type of reaction when two solutions react to form an insoluble substance.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

91/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
2 Acids are important laboratory chemicals.
(a) Some acids completely dissociate in water to form ions.
(i) State the term applied to acids that completely dissociate in water.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the equation to show the complete dissociation of sulfuric acid in water.
H2SO4 → ..................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State the colour of methyl orange in sulfuric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The equation for the reaction between powdered zinc carbonate and dilute nitric acid is shown.
ZnCO3....... + 2HNO3....... → Zn(NO3)2....... + H2O....... + CO2.......
(i) Complete the equation by adding state symbols. [2]
(ii) A student found that 2.5 g of zinc carbonate required 20 cm3 of dilute nitric acid to react
completely.
Calculate the concentration of dilute nitric acid using the following steps:
● calculate the mass of 1 mole of ZnCO3
.............................. g
● calculate the number of moles of ZnCO3 reacting
.............................. moles
● determine the number of moles of HNO3 reacting
.............................. moles
● calculate the concentration of HNO3.
.............................. mol / dm3

[4]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/O/N/21

92/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 Atoms contain protons, neutrons and electrons.
(a) Complete the table to show the relative mass and the relative charge of a proton, a neutron
and an electron.
relative mass relative charge
proton
neutron
1
electron 1840
[3]
(b) The table shows the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in some atoms and ions.
Complete the table.
atom number of number of number of

or ion protons neutrons electrons
16S
32
19K
39 +
35 44 36
[5]
[Total: 8]

93/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 Chlorine reacts with carbon monoxide to produce phosgene gas, COCl 2(g). A catalyst is used.
Cl 2(g) + CO(g) COCl 2(g)
The reaction is exothermic.
(a) Explain why the reaction is exothermic in terms of the energy changes of bond breaking and
bond making.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) (i) Complete the energy level diagram for this reaction.
On your diagram show:
● the product of the reaction

● an arrow representing the energy change, labelled H
● an arrow representing the activation energy, labelled A.
Cl 2(g) + CO(g)
energy
progress of reaction
[3]
(ii) State why a catalyst is used.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/O/N/21

94/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(c)
(i) the pressure is increased
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) the temperature is increased.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) The reaction between chlorine and carbon monoxide can be represented as shown.
O
Cl Cl + CO C
Cl Cl
When one mole of chlorine reacts with one mole of carbon monoxide, 230 kJ of energy is
released.
Some bond energies are shown in the table.

Cl –Cl 240
C=O 745
C–Cl 400
Use the information to calculate the energy of the bond between the C and the O in
carbon monoxide, CO.
bond energy in carbon monoxide, CO = .............................. kJ / mol [3]

95/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(e) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of COCl 2.
C
Cl Cl
Show outer electrons only.
Cl Cl
[3]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/O/N/21

96/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 Iron is a transition element. Potassium is a Group I element.
(a) Iron and potassium have the same type of bonding.
Name and describe the type of bonding in these two elements.
name ..........................................................................................................................................
description .................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Transition elements and Group I elements have some similar physical properties.
They can both:
● be hammered into a shape

● conduct electricity
● be stretched into wires.
(i) Name the term used to describe the ability of elements to be hammered into a shape.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe what happens to the particles in iron when it is hammered into a shape.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest why copper, rather than other transition elements, is used for wires which conduct
electricity.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Transition elements are harder and stronger than Group I elements.
Describe how two other physical

Group I elements.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]

97/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(d) Chemical properties of some Group I elements are shown in the table.
element reaction with cold water reaction with oxygen

colour
● steadily effervesces
lithium very slowly forms an oxide layer red
● forms a colourless solution
● strongly effervesces
sodium slowly forms an oxide layer
● very strongly effervesces
potassium quickly forms an oxide layer
rubidium ruby red
(i) Add to the table:
● the flame test colours for sodium and potassium

● the predicted reactions of rubidium with water and with oxygen.
[4]
(ii) Name the gas produced when Group I elements react with water.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the solution formed when potassium reacts with water.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Predict the pH of the colourless solution formed when potassium reacts with water.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Write the chemical equation for the reaction of sodium with oxygen.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Iron is a typical transition element. It is the catalyst used in the Haber process.
(i) Write the equation for the reaction that occurs in the Haber process.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the temperature and pressure used in the Haber process. Include units.
temperature ........................................................................................................................
pressure ..............................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 22]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/O/N/21

98/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
6 Ethanol, C2H5OH, belongs to the homologous series called alcohols.
(a) Write the general formula of alcohols.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain why ethanol cannot be described as a hydrocarbon.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Ethanol can be manufactured from different substances by reaction with steam or by
fermentation.
(i) Give the formula of the substance which reacts with steam to form ethanol.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name a substance which will undergo fermentation to form ethanol.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Ethanol is a fuel.
Write the chemical equation for the complete combustion of ethanol.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

99/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
(e) Ethane-1,2-diol has two alcohol functional groups.
H H
H O C C O H
H H
One molecule of ethane-1,2-diol will react with two molecules of ethanoic acid to form
molecule X.
X has two ester functional groups and a molecular formula of C6H10O4.
(i) State the empirical formula of X.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of X.
[2]
(iii) Name the other substance formed in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Each alcohol functional group in ethane-1,2-diol reacts with acidified potassium manganate(VII)
to form a different organic compound, Y.
(i) Name the functional groups formed in Y.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of Y.
[1]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/O/N/21

100/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/O/N/21

101/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/O/N/21

102/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher ( E to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
o avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright ac nowledgements are reproduced online in the ambridge
ssessment nternational Education opyright c nowledgements oo let. his is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
ambridge ssessment nternational Education is part of the ambridge ssessment roup. ambridge ssessment is the brand name of the niversity of
ambridge ocal Examinations yndicate ( E , which itself is a department of the niversity of ambridge.
© UCLES 2021 0620/42/O/N/21

103/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2021
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
104/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/O/N/21
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*6388004630*
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB21 11_0620_43/3RP
105/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 A list of substances is shown.
ammonia
bauxite
carbon dioxide
carbon monoxide
ethanol
hematite
oxygen
sodium chloride
sulfur dioxide
Answer the questions using the list of substances.
Each substance may be used once, more than once or not at all.
State which substance is:
(a) an element ........................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) an ore of aluminium ............................................................................................................. [1]
(c) a gas that causes acid rain .................................................................................................. [1]
(d) used as a fuel ...................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) an ionic compound .............................................................................................................. [1]
(f) produced in the Haber process ........................................................................................... [1]
(g) a product of respiration ........................................................................................................ [1]
(h) a toxic product of the incomplete combustion of hydrocarbons
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(i) a gas produced in the test for nitrate ions. .......................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/O/N/21

106/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(a) State the meaning of the term electrolyte.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The table gives information about the electrolysis of two electrolytes. Carbon (graphite)
electrodes are used in each experiment.
(i) Complete the table to show the observations and products of electrolysis.
positive electrode (anode) negative electrode (cathode)

electrolyte observations name of product observations name of product
aqueous colourless
copper(II) sulfate bubbles
concentrated aqueous colourless
hydrogen
sodium bromide bubbles
[5]
(ii) Hydrogen is produced at the negative electrode (cathode) during the electrolysis of
concentrated aqueous sodium bromide.
Write the ionic half-equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State two reasons why carbon (graphite) is suitable to use as an electrode.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Name the particle responsible for the conduction of electricity in the metal wires used in a
circuit.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]

107/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 Lead is a metallic element in Group IV. One of the ores of lead is galena, which is an impure form
of lead(II sulfide, b .
Lead also occurs in the ore cerussite, which contains lead(II carbonate, b 3 .
(a) Calculate the relative formula mass, Mr, of b 3 .
Mr of b 3 = .............................. [1]
(b) The Mr of b is 2 .
alculate the percentage of lead by mass in b .
percentage of lead by mass in b .............................. 1
(c) he percentage of lead by mass in b 3 is 77.5%.
Use this information and your answer to (b) to suggest whether it would be better to extract
lead from b 3 or b .
Give a reason for your answer.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) When lead(II) carbonate is heated it decomposes into lead(II oxide, b , and carbon dioxide.
Write a chemical equation for this reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) Lead(II) carbonate reacts with dilute nitric acid. One of the products is aqueous lead(II) nitrate,
b( 3)2.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/O/N/21

108/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(f) Lead(II) oxide and carbon dioxide are oxides of Group IV elements.
(i) Complete the diagram to show the electron arrangement in one molecule of CO2.
Show only the outer electrons.
O C O
[2]
(ii) The melting points of lead(II) oxide and carbon dioxide are shown.
melting point / °C
lead(II) oxide 886
carbon dioxide –56
Use your knowledge of structure and bonding to explain why lead(II) oxide has a much
higher melting point than carbon dioxide.
Your answer should refer to:
● the types of particles involved

● the relative strength of the forces of attraction between the particles.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

109/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(g) art of the reactivity series is shown.
magnesium most reactive
lead
copper least reactive
Aqueous lead(II nitrate contains b2+ ions.
Two experiments are carried out.
In Experiment 1, magnesium is added to aqueous lead(II) nitrate.
In Experiment 2, copper is added to aqueous lead(II) nitrate.
Write an ionic equation for any reaction that occurs in each experiment. If no reaction occurs
write ‘no reaction’.
Experiment 1 .............................................................................................................................
Experiment 2 .............................................................................................................................
[2]
(h) When lead(II) nitrate is heated it decomposes to produce the same gaseous products as when
copper(II) nitrate is heated.
(i) One of the gaseous products is oxygen.
Describe a test for oxygen.
test ......................................................................................................................................
observations .......................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Name the other gaseous product.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/O/N/21

110/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 Carbon is an important element.
(a) Carbon exists as the isotopes 126C and 136C.
Complete the table.
number of protons number of electrons number of neutrons

isotope
in one atom in one atom in one atom
6C
12
6C
13
[2]
(b) Name two forms of the element carbon which have giant covalent structures.
................................................................... and ................................................................... [1]
(c) The Avogadro constant is the number of particles in 1 mole.
The numerical value of the Avogadro constant is 6.02 × 1023.
(i) Calculate the number of molecules in 22.0 g of carbon dioxide, CO2.
............................... molecules [2]
(ii) Calculate the number of molecules in 6.00 dm3 of carbon dioxide gas at room temperature
and pressure.
............................... molecules [1]
[Total: 6]

111/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 (a) Dilute sulfuric acid and aqueous sodium hydroxide can be used to prepare sodium sulfate
crystals using a method that involves titration.
dilute
sulfuric acid
conical flask
25.0 cm3 aqueous

sodium hydroxide
(i) Suggest why universal indicator is not suitable for this titration.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name an indicator that can be used in this titration.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
20.0 cm3 of dilute sulfuric acid neutralises 25.0 cm3 of 1.00 mol / dm3 aqueous sodium hydroxide.
t the end of the titration the conical flas contains aqueous sodium sulfate with the dissolved
indicator as an impurity.
(b) Describe how to prepare a pure sample of sodium sulfate crystals from the original solutions
of dilute sulfuric acid and aqueous sodium hydroxide of the same concentrations.
You are not required to give details of how to carry out the titration.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/O/N/21

112/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(c) Sodium hydrogensulfate, NaHSO4, dissolves in water to produce an aqueous solution, X,

containing Na+, H+ and SO42– ions.
State the observations when the following tests are done.
(i) flame test is carried out on X.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Copper(II) oxide is warmed with an excess of X.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) cidified aqueous barium nitrate is added to X.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

113/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 A student investigates the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide in the presence of a catalyst of

manganese(IV) oxide.
2H2O2(aq) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g)
(a) State the meaning of the term catalyst.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The diagram shows the equipment the student uses.
cotton wool
catalyst of
manganese(IV) oxide
aqueous
hydrogen peroxide
balance
The student uses this method:
● the catalyst is added to the aqueous hydrogen peroxide

● the stop-clock is started
● the mass of the flask and contents is recorded at regular time intervals.
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/O/N/21

114/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
graph of the mass of the flas and contents against time is shown.
mass of the flask

and contents / g
time / s
(i) uggest why the mass of the flas and contents decreases as time increases.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe what happens to the rate of the reaction as time increases.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The student repeats the experiment at a higher temperature. All other conditions stay the
same. The rate of reaction increases.
(i) Explain, in terms of collisions between particles, why the rate of reaction increases at a
higher temperature.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Draw a line on the graph in (b) for the experiment at a higher temperature. [2]
[Total: 10]

115/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
7 (a) Ethanol is a member of the homologous series of alcohols.
Give two characteristics of members of a homologous series.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Ethanol can be manufactured from ethene.
Ethene can be made from long chain hydrocarbons such as decane, C10H22.
Ethene is then converted into ethanol.
(i) Name the process used to obtain ethene from long chain hydrocarbons such as decane,
C10H22.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the chemical equation to show the formation of ethene from decane, C10H22.
C10H22 → C4H8 + ................... + ................... [2]
(iii) Write the chemical equation for the conversion of ethene into ethanol.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Name the type of reaction occurring when ethene is converted into ethanol.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Give one condition for the reaction in which ethene is converted into ethanol.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Ethanol can also be produced by fermentation of carbohydrates such as glucose.
Give two advantages of manufacturing ethanol by fermentation compared to manufacturing

ethanol from ethene.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/O/N/21

116/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(d) (i) Under certain conditions ethene can react with chlorine to produce chloroethene.
The structure of chloroethene is shown.
H H
C C
H Cl
The equation for the chemical reaction is shown.
C2H4 + Cl 2 → C2H3Cl + HCl
State the type of chemical reaction between ethene and chlorine that this equation shows.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Chloroethene monomers can be converted into a polymer called poly(chloroethene).
State the type of polymerisation that produces poly(chloroethene) from chloroethene.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Draw a section of the poly(chloroethene) molecule made from two monomer molecules.
[2]

117/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
(e) The structure of part of a polymer is shown.
O O O
N C N C N C
H H H
This polymer is made from one type of monomer only.
Complete the diagram to show the structure of the monomer used to produce this polymer.
Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the functional groups.
[2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/O/N/21

118/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher ( E to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
o avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright ac nowledgements are reproduced online in the ambridge
ssessment nternational Education opyright c nowledgements oo let. his is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
ambridge ssessment nternational Education is part of the ambridge ssessment roup. ambridge ssessment is the brand name of the niversity of
ambridge ocal Examinations yndicate ( E , which itself is a department of the niversity of ambridge.
© UCLES 2021 0620/43/O/N/21

119/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2021
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
120/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/O/N/21
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes
8 6

*
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
IB20 03_0620_42/2RP
121/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Petroleum is a useful natural resource.
The diagram shows how petroleum can be separated into useful substances.
refinery gas
gasoline fraction
kerosene fraction
diesel oil
fuel oil fraction
lubricating oil fraction

petroleum
(a) What is the name of the separation process shown in the diagram?
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Name the fraction leaving at:
A ................................................................................................................................................
B ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c)
4H10.
(i) Suggest the names of two
............................................................... and .............................................................. [2]
(ii) Write the chemical equation for the complete combustion of butane.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/F/M/20

122/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(d)
(i) Describe the differences in the properties given.
.............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) What difference in the molecules of gasoline and kerosene causes these differences in
properties?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e)
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 13]

123/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
+ power –
supply wires
anodes
+ +
cathode
electrolyte
molten aluminium
(a) (i) Name an ore of aluminium.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) electrolysis?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) °
about 900 °
(i)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest one
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction taking place at:
the negative electrode (cathode) ........................................................................................
the positive electrode (anode) ............................................................................................

[4]
(iv)
.............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/F/M/20

124/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(c)
(i)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State the name and write the formula of the salt formed.
name ...................................................................................................................................
formula ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii)
Name the other product.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) l (OH)3
water.
Write the chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(v) Suggest the names of two other aluminium compounds that decompose when heated to
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 19]

125/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(a)
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b)
and chlorine atoms form ions. Give the formulae of the ions formed.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(c)
shown.
chloride boiling point / °

l3 71
l3
l3 130
l3 283
(i) l 3.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/F/M/20

126/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(iii)
l 3.
Cl Cl
P
Cl
[3]
(d) l3 l2 l5
equilibrium.
l3 l 2(g) l 5(g)
(i) Describe two features of an equilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
made.
temperature is increased ....................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
pressure is increased .........................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[4]
(iii)
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

127/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(e) l5 6.
l5 → 6 l
6 using the following steps.
● 6 formed.
[Mr 6
number of moles = ..............................
number of moles = ..............................
mass = .............................. g
[3]
(f)
(i) What is an ionic bond?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give two
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 28]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/F/M/20

128/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
Iron:
●
● forms coloured compounds
●
(a) Name one

this process.
process ......................................................................................................................................
product made .............................................................................................................................

[2]
(b) II
(i) What colour is this precipitate?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Iron(II) sulfate can be converted to iron(III VII) at room

temperature.
(i) What is the role of potassium manganate(VII) in this reaction?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What condition must be used for this reaction to occur?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) II) ions in this reaction?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) State the colour change seen during this reaction.
from purple to ............................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Deduce the charge on the iron ion in each of these compounds.
3 ...........................................................................................................................................
3 )3 ....................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 12]

129/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(a)
(i) What is the term used to describe these small units?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
H CH3 H CH3 H CH3
C C C C C C
H CH3 H CH3 H CH3
[2]
(b)
What does the term condensation
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/F/M/20

130/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(c)
O O
H O C C O H
H H
N N
H H
(i)
[3]
(ii)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/F/M/20

131/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2020
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
132/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/F/M/20
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 33 8 0
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
1 hour 15 minutes

0*
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 06_0620_41/5RP
133/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 This question is about elements X, Y and Z.

34
(a) An atom of element X is represented as 16 X.
(i) Name the different types of particles found in the nucleus of this atom of X.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What is the term for the total number of particles in the nucleus of an atom?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) 34
What is the total number of particles in the nucleus of an atom of 16 X?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) What is the electronic structure of the ion X2–?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Suggest the formula of the compound formed between aluminium and X.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) What term is used to describe atoms of the same element with different numbers of
particles in the nucleus?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Identify the atom against which the relative masses of all other atoms are compared.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What is the name of the amount of any substance that contains 6.02 1023 particles?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) The constant 6.02 1023 has a name.
What is the name of this constant?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/M/J/20

134/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(c)
of an element’.
Some relative atomic masses are not whole numbers.
Element Y has only two different types of atom, 69Y and 71Y.
The ratio of atoms present in element Y is shown.
69
Y : 71Y = 3 : 2
● Calculate the relative atomic mass of element Y to one decimal place.
relative atomic mass = ..............................
● Identify element Y.
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) Element Z is in Period 3 and Group V.
(i) Identify element Z.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain in terms of electron transfer why Z behaves chemically as a non-metal.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 16]

135/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
2 Magnesium is a metal.
(a) Name and describe the bonding in magnesium.
name ..........................................................................................................................................
description of bonding ...............................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Magnesium oxide, MgO, is formed when magnesium burns in oxygen.
(i) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement of the ions in
magnesium oxide.
The inner shells have been drawn.
Give the charges on the ions.
......... .........
Mg O
[3]
(ii) Write the chemical equation for the reaction that occurs when magnesium burns in oxygen.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Magnesium oxide also forms when magnesium nitrate, Mg(NO3)2, is heated strongly. This is an
endothermic reaction.
(i) Write the chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What type of reaction is this?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name two other compounds of magnesium that form magnesium oxide when heated.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/M/J/20

136/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 Sulfur dioxide, SO2, is used in the manufacture of sulfuric acid.
(a)
Name one of these ores.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The next stage of the process is a reaction which can reach equilibrium.
The equation for this stage is shown.
2SO2(g) + O2(g) 2SO3(g)
(i) Describe two features of an equilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name the catalyst used in this stage.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Why is a catalyst used?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Explain, in terms of particles, why a high temperature increases the rate of this reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(v) In this stage, only a moderate temperature of 450 °C is used.
What does this suggest about the forward reaction?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) Calculate the percentage by mass of sulfur in sulfur trioxide, SO3.
percentage = .............................. [2]

137/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(c) Concentrated sulfuric acid is a dehydrating agent which can chemically remove water from
substances.
Both hydrated copper(II) sulfate crystals and sucrose (a sugar), C12H22O11, can be completely
dehydrated by concentrated sulfuric acid.
Name the solid product formed in each case.
hydrated copper(II) sulfate crystals ...........................................................................................
sucrose ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) When propan-1-ol is heated with concentrated sulfuric acid as a catalyst an unsaturated
hydrocarbon of relative molecular mass 42 is formed and one other product.
(i) What is meant by the term unsaturated ?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Name the unsaturated hydrocarbon formed.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/M/J/20

138/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 This question is about reactions of bases and acids.
(a) Ammonia is a gas at room temperature.
What is the test for ammonia gas? Describe the positive result of this test.
test .............................................................................................................................................
result ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Ammonia reacts with water to form ions.
NH3 + H2O NH4+ + OH–
(i) How does this equation show that ammonia, NH3, behaves as a base?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Aqueous ammonia is described as a weak base.
Suggest the pH of aqueous ammonia.
pH = .............................. [1]
(iii) Describe what is seen when aqueous ammonia is added to aqueous copper(II) sulfate,
until no further change is seen.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

139/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(c) Aqueous sodium hydroxide, NaOH(aq), is a strong alkali that reacts with dilute sulfuric acid
exothermically.
(i) What type of reaction is this?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the equation for the reaction between aqueous sodium hydroxide and dilute
sulfuric acid.
2NaOH + H2SO4 → ......................... + .........................

[2]
(d)
found that 25.0 cm3 of 0.0400 mol / dm3 NaOH(aq) reacted exactly with 20.0 cm3 of H2SO4(aq).
(i) Name a suitable indicator to use in this titration.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the concentration of the H2SO4(aq) in mol / dm3 using the following steps.
● Calculate the number of moles of NaOH in 25.0 cm3.
moles = ..............................
● Deduce the number of moles of H2SO4 that reacted with the 25.0 cm3 of NaOH(aq).
moles = ..............................
● Calculate the concentration of H2SO4(aq) in mol / dm3.
concentration = .............................. mol / dm3

[3]
(iii) Calculate the concentration of the 0.0400 mol / dm3 NaOH(aq) in g / dm3.
concentration = .............................. g / dm3 [2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/M/J/20

140/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 Ethanol is manufactured by two different processes.
(a) For each process, name the organic reactant and state the type of reaction.
organic reactant ............................................... type of reaction ..............................................
organic reactant ............................................... type of reaction ..............................................

[4]
(b) Alcohols can be oxidised to form carboxylic acids.
Name a suitable oxidising agent for this reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Alcohols can be partially oxidised to form aldehydes.
Aldehydes are a homologous series of organic compounds.
Partial oxidation is achieved by reacting an alcohol with the oxidising agent in distillation
apparatus as shown.
thermometer
round-bottomed
flask
distillate
heat
(i) Name apparatus A.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On the diagram, use one arrow to show where water enters apparatus A. [1]

141/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(d) The table shows some information about aldehydes.
(i) Complete the table.
name ethanal propanal butanal

....................
molecular formula CH2O C 2H 4O C 3H 6O

....................
[2]
(ii) Deduce the general formula of aldehydes.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) The structural formula of ethanal is shown.
H O
H C C
H H
The C=O group in aldehydes is at the end of the carbon chain.

This is a reactive part of the molecule.
(i) What is the name given to the reactive part of any organic molecule?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement of a molecule of
ethanal. Inner shells have been drawn.
H O
H C C
H
H
[3]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/M/J/20

142/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(f) Propanone belongs to a homologous series called ketones. Ketones have the same C=O
group as aldehydes but the C=O group is not at the end of the carbon chain. Propanone has
the same molecular formula as propanal, C3H6O.
(i) What term is used to describe molecules with different structures but with the same
molecular formula?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the structure of propanone, C3H6O. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[2]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/M/J/20

143/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2020
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
144/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/M/J/20
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3366
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes
3 8*
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 06_0620_42/4RP
145/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 (a) Give the name of the process that:
(i) occurs when a gas turns into a liquid
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) is used to separate a mixture of liquids with different boiling points
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) is used to extract aluminium from aluminium oxide
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) is used to separate a mixture of amino acids.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The symbols of the elements in Period 2 of the Periodic Table are shown.
Li Be B C N O F Ne
For each of the following, give the symbol of an element from Period 2 which matches the
description.
Which element:
(i) combines with hydrogen to produce ammonia
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) makes up approximately 21% of clean, dry air
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) has atoms with only two electrons in the outer shell
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) has atoms with only seven protons
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) is a monoatomic gas
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) is a soft metal stored in oil?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/M/J/20

146/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Fluorine forms both ionic and covalent compounds.
(a)
Mg F
(i) Complete the dot-and-cross diagrams to show the electronic structures of one magnesium
......... .........
Mg F
[3]
(ii)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) not conduct electricity when it is solid.
made.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

147/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(b) 2 2 is
shown.
F F
C
Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of
F F
[3]
(c)
melting point / °C
1263
–111
(i)
high melting point.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
melting point.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/M/J/20

148/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 (a)
stage 1
stage 2
stage 3
stage 4
(i) How is sulfur converted into sulfur dioxide in stage 1?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how sulfur dioxide is converted into sulfur trioxide in stage 2.
● an equation for the reaction

● the temperature used
● the name of the catalyst used.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) The reaction in stage 2 can reach equilibrium.
What is meant by the term equilibrium?
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) 2 2 7, in stage 3.
What is sulfur trioxide reacted with to convert it into oleum?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) stage 4.
Write a chemical equation for the conversion of oleum, H2 2 7, into sulfuric acid.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

149/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(d) When copper is reacted with hot concentrated sulfuric acid, sulfur dioxide gas is formed.
Balance the chemical equation for this reaction.
Cu + .......H2 4 → 4 2 + .......H2
(e)
potassium manganate(VII).
starting colour of the solution .....................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
[1]
(f) When sulfuric acid reacts with ammonia the salt produced is ammonium sulfate.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(g) Barium sulfate is an insoluble salt.
Barium sulfate can be made from aqueous ammonium sulfate using a precipitation reaction.
(i) Name a solution that can be added to aqueous ammonium sulfate to produce a precipitate
of barium sulfate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write an ionic equation for this precipitation reaction. Include state symbols.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/M/J/20

150/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 IV) oxide is the

catalyst for this reaction.
(a) What is meant by the term catalyst ?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A student measures the volume of oxygen produced at regular time intervals using the
apparatus shown. Large lumps of manganese(IV) oxide are used.
gas syringe
manganese(IV) oxide
aqueous hydrogen peroxide
catalyst
A graph of the results is shown.
volume
of oxygen
produced
/ cm3
0
0 time / s
What happens to the rate of this reaction as time increases?

In your answer, explain why the rate changes in this way.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) The experiment is repeated using the same mass of manganese(IV) oxide. Powdered
manganese(IV) oxide is used instead of large lumps. All other conditions stay the same.
(b) to show how the volume of oxygen changes with time. [2]

151/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(d) In terms of particles, explain what happens to the rate of this reaction when the temperature is
increased.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) The equation for the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide is shown.
2H2 2(aq) → 2H2 2(g)
25.0 cm3 of aqueous hydrogen peroxide forms 48.0 cm3 of oxygen at room temperature and
pressure (r.t.p.).
Calculate the concentration of aqueous hydrogen peroxide at the start of the experiment using
the following steps.
● Calculate the number of moles of oxygen formed.
.............................. mol
● Deduce the number of moles of hydrogen peroxide that decomposed.
.............................. mol
● Calculate the concentration of hydrogen peroxide in mol / dm3.
.............................. mol / dm3

[3]
(f) V), KCl 3.
The only products of this decomposition are potassium chloride and oxygen.
Write a chemical equation for this decomposition.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/M/J/20

152/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 Electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride using inert electrodes forms chlorine,
hydrogen and sodium hydroxide.
(a) What is meant by the term electrolysis?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Name a substance that can be used as the inert electrodes.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Write an ionic half-equation for the formation of hydrogen during this electrolysis.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Give the formulae of the four ions present in concentrated aqueous sodium chloride.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Explain how sodium hydroxide is formed during this electrolysis.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

153/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 (a) Propane reacts with chlorine in a photochemical reaction as shown.
C3H8 + Cl 2 → C3H7Cl + HCl
(i) What type of reaction is this?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What condition is needed for this photochemical reaction to occur?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Draw two structural isomers of compounds with the formula C3H7Cl.
[2]
(b) Propene reacts with chlorine in an addition reaction as shown.
C3H6 + Cl 2 → C3H6Cl 2
(i)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/M/J/20

154/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(ii) The structures of the reactants and products of this reaction are shown.
H H H H H H
H C C C H + Cl Cl → H C C C H
H H Cl Cl
bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol
C–C 347
C=C 612
C–H 413
C–Cl 339
Cl –Cl 242
Calculate the energy change for the reaction between propene and chlorine using the
following steps.
● Calculate the energy needed to break the bonds.
.............................. kJ
● Calculate the energy released when bonds are formed.
.............................. kJ
● Calculate the energy change for the reaction between propene and chlorine.
.............................. kJ / mol
[3]

155/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
(c) There are three functional groups in compound A.
compound A
COOH CH2OH
C C
H H
(i) Name the homologous series of compounds that contains the following structures.
C=C ....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) What would you observe when compound A is added to:
aqueous bromine ................................................................................................................
aqueous sodium carbonate? ..............................................................................................

[2]
(d) Compound A can be used as a single monomer to produce two different polymers.
(i) Draw one repeat unit of the addition polymer formed from compound A.
[2]
(ii) What type of condensation polymer is formed from compound A?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/M/J/20

156/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/M/J/20

157/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/M/J/20

158/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/M/J/20

159/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2020
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
160/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/M/J/20
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*6
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
1 hour 15 minutes
843 4*
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 06_0620_43/5RP
161/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 (a) A B C D E
A B C
H
H H H O H H H H
H C
H C C C C H C C C H H
C C
H H H O H H H H H H
D E
H H H H H O
H C C C O H H C C C
H H H H H O H
(i)
(ii) 2
(iii) one
(iv) one
H Cl H
H C C C H
H H H
(v) two
(vi)
(vii) one
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/M/J/20

162/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(viii) D
(b)
weak acid

163/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(a)
N2 2
(i)
(ii) one
(b)
/°
58
28
42
(c)
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/M/J/20

164/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(d)
Stage 1
2 → 2
(i) stage 1
(ii)
(iii) stage 2
2 → 2

165/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(iv) stage 3
2 2 2 →
● 2
● 2
(e) stage 3
2 2 2 →
4NO2 + 2H2O + O2
energy
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/M/J/20

166/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(a)
(i)
(ii)
17Cl
35
17Cl
37 –
(b) (i)
l2 → l 2
(ii) no
(c)
......... .........
Mg Cl

167/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(d)
2 l2 → l
l l → l
l l
l
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/M/J/20

168/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
4 (a)
(b) II
(i)
(ii)
(c)
solvent front
X
start line
(i) not
(ii) Rf X
(iii)

169/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
5 (a)
(b)
A B
temperature
time
A B
(c)
two
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/M/J/20

170/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
6 (a)
(i)
2 → 2 2
(ii)
(b)
test

171/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
(a) electrolysis
(b)
(c) (i) cannot
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(d)
two
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/M/J/20

172/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(e)
(i) III
(ii) two

173/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
8 (a)
O O O O O
C C N N C C N N C
H H H H
(i) one on the diagram
(ii) two
(iii)
(b)
(c)
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/M/J/20

174/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/M/J/20

175/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2020
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
176/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/M/J/20
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
8 08
1 hour 15 minutes

6 *
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 11_0620_41/2RP
177/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 (a) This question is about elements.
aluminium
carbon
iron
hydrogen
oxygen
silicon
sodium
sulfur
Answer the following questions about these elements.
(i) Name the element that can be used as a fuel.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the element that forms an oxide with a similar structure to diamond.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the element that forms an amphoteric oxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Name the element that has oxidation states of +2 and +3.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Name the element extracted from bauxite.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) Name the element that has atoms with the electronic structure 2,6.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

178/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(b) Iron rusts when it is in contact with oxygen and water.
(i)
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State one other
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

179/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(a) State the name of this zinc ore.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b)
Zinc oxide is then reacted with carbon.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the reaction of zinc oxide with carbon.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what type of chemical change happens to the zinc in zinc oxide in this reaction.
chemical change .................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Explain why aluminium is not extracted from aluminium oxide by heating with carbon.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Brass is an alloy of zinc.
Explain, in terms of particles, why brass is harder than pure zinc.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

180/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 (a) Aqueous ammonium sulfate, (NH4)2 4 , is warmed with aqueous sodium hydroxide.
The pungent-smelling gas ammonia, NH3, is produced.
Balance the equation for this reaction.
(NH4)2 4 → ......NH3 + ......H2 2 4 [1]
(b) A 2.8 g sample of impure ammonium sulfate is found to contain 0.7 g of impurities.
Calculate the percentage of ammonium sulfate in this sample.
percentage of ammonium sulfate = .............................. % [1]
(c) Describe a test for ammonia gas.
test .............................................................................................................................................
result ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Ammonia gas is prepared at the front of a laboratory.
The pungent smell of ammonia spreads throughout the laboratory slowly.
(i) Name the process that occurs when ammonia gas spreads throughout the laboratory.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain, using ideas about particles, why ammonia gas spreads throughout the laboratory.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) 2 , will spread throughout the laboratory at a slower

rate than ammonia gas, NH3.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

181/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(e) Ammonia is produced in the Haber process.
The equation for the reaction is shown.
N2(g) + 3H2(g) → 2NH3(g)
(i) In the Haber process, a temperature of 450 °C and a pressure of 200 atmospheres are
A larger equilibrium yield of ammonia would be produced if a lower temperature and a

higher pressure are used.
Explain why a lower temperature and a higher pressure are not used.
lower temperature ...............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
higher pressure ...................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the role of iron in the Haber process.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Ammonia is a weak base.
(i) Explain the meaning of the term base.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the pH of aqueous ammonia.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

182/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 Air is a mixture of gases.
(a)
number.
.............................. % [1]
(b)
(i) Name the process used to separate oxygen and nitrogen from liquid air.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the property of oxygen and nitrogen that allows these gases to be separated using
this process.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) 2
2 .
Show only the outer electrons.
O C O
[2]

183/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(d)
measured in parts per million (ppm).
420
400
380
concentration of
carbon dioxide
/ ppm 360
340
320
1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020

year
The data shown in the graph is of global concern.
Explain why.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e)
atmosphere.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

184/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 (a) Dilute sulfuric acid is electrolysed using the apparatus shown in the diagram.
power
supply
+ – inert electrodes
dilute sulfuric acid
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why inert electrodes are used.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the products formed at each electrode.
..............................................................................................................
................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv)
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

185/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(b)
stages.
(i) Stage 1
Write the chemical equation for stage 1.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The equation for stage 2 is shown.
2 2 (g) 3 (g)
The reaction can reach equilibrium.
Explain what is meant by the term equilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) stage 2 is shown.
2SO2(g) + O2(g)
energy
2SO3(g)
Explain what the diagram shows about the energy changes in the forward reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

186/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(c) In stage 3 3 2 S2 7 .
In stage 4 oleum reacts to form sulfuric acid, H2 4 .
State what oleum reacts with in stage 4.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) A sample of sulfuric acid, H2 4 , has a concentration of 0.75 mol / dm3.
Calculate the concentration of sulfuric acid in g / dm3.
.............................. g / dm3 [2]
[Total: 15]

187/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 (a) Ethane, propane and butane are members of the same homologous series.
(i) Name this homologous series.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two ways members of the same homologous series are similar.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) 2 H6, contains 6.02 1023 molecules.
Calculate how many molecules are in 15 g of ethane.
number of ethane molecules = .............................. [1]
(c) Propane reacts with chlorine.
(i) Write the formula of the product which does not contain carbon.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of an organic product formed. Show all of the atoms and all of the
bonds.
[1]
(iii) State the name of this type of reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

188/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(d) (i) Aqueous bromine was added to a sample of ethene.
from ............................................................. to ............................................................ [2]
(ii) Explain, in terms of bonding, why there is no colour change when aqueous bromine is
added to ethane.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) There are two structural isomers with the formula C4H10.
(i) Draw the structures of both of these isomers, showing all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[2]
(ii) Butane is formed when longer chain hydrocarbons are cracked.
Complete the chemical equation to show the other product when butane is formed by
cracking.
C6H14 → C4H10 + ................................ [1]

189/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
(f) A compound contains 85.7% carbon and 14.3% hydrogen by mass.
(i) Calculate the empirical formula of this compound.
Show your working.
.............................. [2]
(ii) The molecular mass of the compound is 112.
Calculate the molecular formula of this compound.
.............................. [1]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

190/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
7 (a) Ethanol can be manufactured by two different methods.
Method 1: fermentation of a sugar, C6H12 6
C6H12 6 → 2C2H5 2
Method 2: reaction of ethene with steam
C2H4 + H2 → C 2H 5
(i) one
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) one
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) VII) to form water and a product that turns

litmus red.
(i) State the name of the product that turns the litmus red.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
potassium manganate(VII).
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Ethanol reacts with methanoic acid to form an ester.
(i) Name the ester formed in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of the ester formed.

[1]

191/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
16
(d) The table shows the melting points of ethanol and sodium chloride.
substance melting point / °C

ethanol –114
sodium chloride 801
these substances.
melting points.
ethanol .......................................................................................................................................
sodium chloride .........................................................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

192/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
17
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

193/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

194/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0620/41/O/N/20

195/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2020
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
20
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
196/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/O/N/20
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
838 83*
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 11_0620_42/4RP
197/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The electronic structures of some atoms and ions are shown.
A B C D
2+ 3–
+
E F G H
–
–
(a) Write the letters, A, B, C, D, E, F, G or H, of the electronic structures which show:
(i) atoms of two different noble gases ....................................... and ......................................

[2]
(ii) an ion of a Group I element .......................................................................................... [1]
(iii) an ion of a Group V element ......................................................................................... [1]
(iv) a pair of ions that could form a compound with the formula XY2. ............ and ............. [1]
(b) State which electronic structure, A, B, C, D, E, F, G or H, is incorrect.
Explain why.
incorrect electronic structure .....................................................................................................
explanation ................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State how many protons are found in the nucleus of ion C. ................................................ [1]
(d) Use the Periodic Table to deduce:
(i) the chemical symbol for ion G ...................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the element which forms an ion with a 3+ charge and the same electronic structure as H.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/O/N/20

198/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Soluble salts can be made by adding a metal carbonate to a dilute acid.
(a) Give the formula of the dilute acid which reacts with a metal carbonate to form a nitrate salt.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A student wanted to make hydrated iron(II) sulfate crystals, FeSO4•xH2O, by adding excess
iron(II) carbonate to dilute sulfuric acid. The student followed the procedure shown.
step 1 Add dilute sulfuric acid to a beaker.
step 2 Add small amounts of iron(II) carbonate to the dilute sulfuric acid in the beaker until
the iron(II) carbonate is in excess.
step 3 Filter the mixture formed in step 2.
step 4 Heat the filtrate until it is a saturated solution. Allow to cool.
step 5 Once cold, pour away the remaining solution. Dry the crystals between filter papers.
(i) Why must the iron(II) carbonate be added in excess in step 2?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two observations in step 2 that would show that iron(II) carbonate was in excess.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Describe what should be done during step 3 to ensure there is a maximum yield of crystals.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) A saturated solution is formed in step 4.
Describe what a saturated solution is.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(v) Name a different compound that could be used instead of iron(II) carbonate to produce
hydrated iron(II) sulfate crystals from dilute sulfuric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

199/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(c) On analysing the crystals, the student found that one mole of the hydrated iron(II) sulfate
crystals, FeSO4•xH2O, had a mass of 278 g.
Determine the value of x using the following steps:
● calculate the mass of one mole of FeSO4
mass = .............................. g
● calculate the mass of H2O present in one mole of FeSO4•xH2O
mass of H2O = .............................. g
● determine the value of x.
x = ..............................
[3]
(d) Insoluble salts can be made by mixing solutions of two soluble salts.
A student followed the procedure shown to make silver bromide, an insoluble salt.
step 1 Add aqueous silver nitrate to a beaker. Then add aqueous potassium bromide and
stir.
step 2 Filter the mixture formed in step 1.
step 3 Dry the residue.
(i) State the term used to describe this method of making salts.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give the observation the student would make during step 1.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write the ionic equation for the reaction between aqueous silver nitrate and aqueous
potassium bromide.
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/O/N/20

200/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(e) Sodium chloride is an ionic salt. It can be made by reacting sodium with chlorine gas.
The equation for this reaction is shown.
2Na(s) + Cl 2(g) → 2NaCl (s)
Calculate the volume of chlorine gas, in cm3, that reacts to form 2.34 g of NaCl .
The reaction takes place at room temperature and pressure.
volume of chlorine gas = .............................. cm3 [3]
(f) Sodium chloride does not conduct electricity when solid, but does conduct electricity when
molten.
(i) Explain why, in terms of structure and bonding.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Name the product formed at the positive electrode when electricity is passed through
molten sodium chloride.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the type of change that occurs at the positive electrode in (ii).
Explain your answer in terms of electron transfer.
type of change ....................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Describe what else can be done to sodium chloride to allow it to conduct electricity.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 26]

201/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
3 Group I metals are very reactive. Transition elements are also metals but are less reactive than
Group I metals.
(a) State two physical properties of Group I metals which are similar to those of transition metals.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Describe two ways in which the physical properties of Group I metals are different from those
of transition metals.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) When Group I metals are added to water they fizz and an alkaline solution forms.
(i) Name the gas given off.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Identify the ion present in the solution which makes the solution alkaline.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write the chemical equation for the reaction between sodium and water.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) When the transition element iron is added to water the iron rusts.
When an iron object is coated with a layer of zinc, rusting is prevented.
(i) Name this process of coating iron objects with a layer of zinc.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how completely coating an iron object with a layer of zinc prevents rusting.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Rusting of iron ships can be prevented by attaching zinc blocks to the hull of the ship.
Explain how this prevents rusting.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/O/N/20

202/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 Alkenes and alkanes are homologous series of compounds containing carbon and hydrogen atoms.
(a) State the name of the type of compound made from carbon and hydrogen atoms only.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Alkenes take part in addition reactions.
(i) Describe what is meant by the term addition reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of the product made in the addition reaction between propene and
bromine. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[2]
(iii) Describe the colour change seen when propene is added to aqueous bromine.
from ............................................................ to ............................................................ [2]
(iv) Draw the structures of molecules of two different alkenes which both undergo an addition
reaction with steam to form butan-2-ol. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[2]
(c) Propane undergoes a substitution reaction with chlorine.
Write the chemical equation for the reaction between one molecule of propane and one
molecule of chlorine.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

203/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 This question is about alcohols, carboxylic acids and esters.
(a) Ethanol will react with hot aqueous potassium manganate(VII) to form ethanoic acid.
(i) State the other condition needed for this reaction to take place.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the type of chemical change that happens to the ethanol during this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The structure of ethanoic acid is shown.
H O
H C C
H O H

ethanoic acid.
H O
H C C
H O H
[3]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/O/N/20

204/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(b) Ethanoic acid is a weak acid and hydrochloric acid is a strong acid.
Complete the table to show the similarities and differences in the properties of samples of
these two acids of equal concentration.
dilute ethanoic acid dilute hydrochloric acid
extent of dissociation
colour after adding

universal indicator solution
observation when
magnesium ribbon is added
[6]
(c) Ethanoic acid will react with an alcohol to form the ester shown.
H O H C H
H C C O C H
H H C H
(i) Name the other product formed when ethanoic acid reacts with an alcohol to make this
ester.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give one condition needed when ethanoic acid reacts with the alcohol to make this ester.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Draw the structure of the alcohol which was added to ethanoic acid to make this ester.
[2]

205/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(d) Polyesters can be manufactured from carboxylic acids and alcohols.
Hexanedioic acid has the structure: HOOC–CH2–CH2–CH2–CH2–COOH.
This structure can be simplified as shown.
O O
H O C C O H
Ethanediol has the structure: HO–CH2–CH2–OH.
This structure can be simplified as shown.
H O O H
The functional groups are found at the end of each molecule.
(i) State what is meant by the term functional group.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Determine the empirical formula of hexanedioic acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Calculate the percentage by mass of oxygen present in ethanediol.
Give your answer to the nearest whole number.
.............................. % [2]
(iv) Complete the diagram to show a section of polyester manufactured from hexanedioic acid
and ethanediol. Include all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the linkages.
[2]
(v) State the name of a polyester.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 22]
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/O/N/20

206/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0620/42/O/N/20

207/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2020
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
208/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/O/N/20
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE™
*0774897954*
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
IB20 11_0620_43/4RP R
209/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The names of nine substances are shown.
aluminium oxide
ammonia
carbon monoxide
anhydrous cobalt(II) chloride
hydrated copper(II) sulfate
iron(III) oxide
nitrogen dioxide
silver
steel
Answer the following questions using these substances. Each substance may be used once, more
than once or not at all.
Name the substance that is:
(a) the main constituent of hematite .......................................................................................... [1]
(b) a gas produced in car engines which causes acid rain ....................................................... [1]
(c) an alkaline gas ..................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) an element ........................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) a gas formed by the incomplete combustion of fossil fuels ................................................. [1]
(f) used to test for the presence of water. ................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/O/N/20

210/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 A, B, C, D and E.

particle
electrons neutrons protons
A 10 13 11
B 18 20 18
C 18 18 18
D 10 12 8
E 10 10 10
(a) State the atomic number of A.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State the nucleon number of B.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Write the electronic structure of C.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Give the letters of all the particles which are:
(i) atoms ............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) positive ions .................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) negative ions ................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) isotopes of each other. ................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

211/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 This question is about nitrogen and some of its compounds.
(a) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of
nitrogen, N2.
Show the outer shell electrons only.
N N
[2]
(b) Nitrogen can be converted into ammonia by the Haber process.
(i) Describe how nitrogen is obtained for the Haber process.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give the essential reaction conditions and write a chemical equation for the reaction
occurring in the Haber process.
chemical equation: ..............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
reaction conditions: .............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[5]
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/O/N/20

212/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(c) Some of the ammonia made by the Haber process is converted into nitric acid.
4NH3(g) + 5O2(g) 4NO(g) + 6H2O(g)
The process is carried out at 900 °C and a pressure of 5 atmospheres using an alloy of platinum
and rhodium as a catalyst.
(i) State the meaning of the term catalyst.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the meaning of the term oxidation.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Complete the table using the words increase, decrease or no change.
of the forward reaction yield of NO(g)
increasing the temperature
increasing the pressure
[4]
(d) 2 .
2NO(g) + O2(g) → 2NO2(g)
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

213/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(e) Ammonium nitrate, NH4NO3, is a fertiliser.
Calculate the percentage by mass of nitrogen in ammonium nitrate.
.............................. % [2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/O/N/20

214/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4
ZnS.
(a)
Name the other product formed in this reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b)
furnace.
(i) Give two reasons why coke is needed.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the formation of zinc in the furnace.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Zinc has a melting point of 420 °C and a boiling point of 907 °C. The temperature inside the
furnace is 1200 °C.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) The gaseous zinc is converted to molten zinc.
Name this change of state.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

215/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(c) Zinc reacts with dilute sulfuric acid to produce aqueous zinc sulfate.
Zn(s) + H2SO4(aq) → ZnSO4(aq) + H2(g)
Hydrated zinc sulfate crystals are made from aqueous zinc sulfate.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3 Aqueous zinc sulfate is heated until the solution is saturated.
Step 4 The saturated solution is allowed to cool and crystallise.
Step 5 The crystals are removed and dried.
(i) Name the residue in step 2.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) In step 3, a saturated solution is produced.
Describe what a saturated solution is.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Name two compounds each of which react with dilute sulfuric acid to produce aqueous
zinc sulfate.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/O/N/20

216/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(d) When hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals, MgSO4•xH2
MgSO4•xH2O(s) → MgSO4(s) + xH2O(g)
x in MgSO4•xH2O.
Step 1 Hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals were weighed.
Step 2 Hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals were heated.
Step 3 The remaining solid was weighed.
(i)
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) 4 •xH2O. The mass of

MgSO4 remaining was 0.60 g.
Mr: MgSO4 = 120; Mr: H2O = 18
● Calculate the number of moles of MgSO4 remaining.
moles of MgSO4 = ..............................
mass of H2O = .............................. g
● Calculate the moles of H2O given off.
moles of H2O = ..............................
x = ..............................
[4]
[Total: 17]

217/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
5
Periodic Table.
(a) Describe the trend in the reactivity of Group I elements.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) When potassium is added to water a chemical reaction occurs.
(i) State two observations that can be made when potassium is added to water.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction of potassium with water.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c)
(i) Write a chemical equation for the reaction that occurs when aqueous potassium iodide is
added to chlorine.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d)
(i) State the meaning of the term electrolysis.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what must be done to sodium chloride before it can be electrolysed to produce
sodium.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write an ionic half-equation for the change that occurs at the cathode during this electrolysis.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/O/N/20

218/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(e) Chromium is a transition element.
● Chromium has a high melting point.

● Chromium is a good conductor of electricity.
● Many chromium compounds are soluble in water.
● Hydrated chromium(III) sulfate is green.
● Chromium forms the chlorides CrCl 2 and CrCl 3.
●
(i) Use this information to give two

of Group I elements such as sodium.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Use this information to give two properties of chromium which are similar to properties of
Group I elements such as sodium.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 16]

219/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 (a)
(i) State the meaning of the term structural isomers.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
atoms.
ester
name ................................................ name ................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/O/N/20

220/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(b) Part of a polyester chain is shown. This polyester is made from one monomer.
O O O O
O C O C O C O C
(i) On the diagram draw a ring around one unit of the polymer that is repeated. [1]
(ii) Name the type of polymerisation that produces polyesters.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Complete the diagram to show the structure of the monomer used to produce this polyester.
Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the functional groups.
[2]
(c) A polyamide is made from the two monomers shown.
H 2N NH2 HOOC COOH
Complete the diagram to show a section of the polyamide made from the two monomers.
Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the linkages.
[2]
(d) Naturally occurring polyamides are constituents of food.
(i) State the name given to naturally occurring polyamides.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the monomers which form naturally occurring polyamides.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 14]

221/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/O/N/20

222/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0620/43/O/N/20

223/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2020
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
224/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/O/N/20
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge IGCSE®
CHEMISTRY 0620/04
*0123456789*
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) For examination from 2020

SPECIMEN PAPER
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.

Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
A copy of the Periodic Table is printed on page 20.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
225/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The following table gives information about six substances.
melting point boiling point electrical conductivity electrical conductivity

substance
/ °C / °C as a solid as a liquid
A 839 1484 good good
B –188 –42 poor poor
C 776 1497 poor good
D –117 78 poor poor
E 1607 2227 poor poor
F –5 102 poor good
(a) Which substance could be a metal?
[1]
(b) State all the substances that are liquid at room temperature.
[1]
(c) Which substance could have a macromolecular structure similar to that of silicon(IV) oxide?
[1]
(d) Which substance could be propane?
[1]
(e) Which substance could be sodium chloride?
[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

226/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 The table gives the composition of three particles.

particle
A 15 15 16
B 15 18 16
C 15 15 17
(a) What is the evidence in the table for each of the following?
(i) Particle A is an atom.
[1]
(ii) A, B and C are all particles of the same element.
[1]
(iii) Particles A and C are isotopes of the same element.
[2]
(b) (i) What is the electronic structure of particle A?
[1]
(ii) Is element A, a metal or a non-metal? Give a reason for your choice.
[1]
[Total: 6]

227/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 Kinetic theory explains the properties of matter in terms of the arrangement and movement of
particles.
(a) Nitrogen is a gas at room temperature. Nitrogen molecules, N2, are spread far apart and
move in a random manner at high speed.
(i) Draw the electronic structure of a nitrogen molecule.

Show only the outer electron shells.
[2]
(ii) Compare the movement and arrangement of the molecules in solid nitrogen to those in
nitrogen gas.
[3]
(b) A sealed container contains nitrogen gas. The pressure of the gas is due to the molecules of
the gas hitting the walls of the container.
Use the kinetic theory to explain why the pressure inside the container increases when the
temperature is increased.
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

228/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
The following apparatus can be used to measure the rate of diffusion of a gas.
constant
pressure
applied metal foil,
gas escapes
gas syringe gas through small
hole in foil
The following results were obtained.
temperature rate of diffusion

gas
/ °C in cm3 / min
nitrogen 25 1.00
chlorine 25 0.63
nitrogen 50 1.05
(c) (i) Explain why nitrogen gas diffuses faster than chlorine gas.
[2]
(ii) Explain why the nitrogen gas diffuses faster at the higher temperature.
[1]
[Total: 10]

229/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 Chromium is a transition element.
(a) (i) State two differences in the physical properties of chromium and sodium.
[2]
(ii) State two differences in the chemical properties of chromium and sodium.
[2]
(b) Chromium is used to electroplate steel objects. The diagram shows how this could be done.
+ –
lead anode object to

be plated
chromium(III)
sulfate(aq)
(i) Give two reasons why steel objects are plated with chromium.
[2]
(ii) The formula of the chromium(III) ion is Cr3+ and of the sulfate ion is SO42–. Give the
formula of chromium(III) sulfate.
[1]
(iii) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction at the negative electrode (cathode).
[2]
(iv) A colourless gas, which relights a glowing splint, is formed at the positive electrode
(anode).
State the name of this gas.
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

230/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(v) During electroplating, it is necessary to add more chromium(III) sulfate but during
copper plating using a copper anode, it is not necessary to add more copper(II) sulfate.
Explain this difference.
[2]
[Total: 12]

231/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 Iron is extracted from its ore, hematite, in the blast furnace.
waste gases
raw materials::
coke, C
iron ore, Fe2O3
firebrick lining limestone, CaCO3
air
slag
molten iron
Describe the reactions involved in this extraction.
Include one equation for a redox reaction and one for an acid/base reaction.
[5]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

232/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
BLANK PAGE

233/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 Soluble salts can be made using a base and an acid.
(a) Complete this method of preparing dry crystals of the soluble salt
cobalt(II) chloride-6-water from the insoluble base cobalt(II) carbonate.
step 1
Add an excess of cobalt(II) carbonate to hot dilute hydrochloric acid.
step 2
step 3
step 4
[4]
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

234/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(b) (i) 5.95 g of cobalt(II) carbonate were added to 40 cm3 of hydrochloric acid, concentration
2.0 mol / dm3.
Calculate the maximum yield of cobalt(II) chloride-6-water and show that the cobalt(II)
carbonate was in excess.
CoCO3 + 2HCl → CoCl2 + CO2 + H2O
CoCl2 + 6H2O → CoCl2.6H2O
maximum yield:
number of moles of HCl used = ... .. .
number of moles of CoCl2 formed = .. .
number of moles of CoCl2.6H2O formed = .. ..
mass of one mole of CoCl2.6H2O = 238 g
maximum yield of CoCl2.6H2O = .. .. g
to show that cobalt(II) carbonate is in excess:
number of moles of HCl used = . (use your value from above)
mass of one mole of CoCO3 = 119 g
number of moles of CoCO3 in 5.95 g of cobalt(II) carbonate = [5]
(ii) Explain how these calculations show that cobalt(II) carbonate is in excess.
[1]
[Total: 10]

235/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
7 Iodine reacts with chlorine to form dark brown iodine monochloride.
I2 + Cl2 → 2ICl
This reacts with more chlorine to give yellow iodine trichloride.

An equilibrium forms between these iodine chlorides.
ICl(l) + Cl2(g) ⇌ ICl3(s)

dark brown yellow
(a) What do you understand by the term equilibrium?
[2]
(b) When the equilibrium mixture is heated, it becomes a darker brown colour.
Suggest if the reverse reaction is endothermic or exothermic. Give a reason for your choice.
[1]
(c) The pressure on the equilibrium mixture is decreased.
(i) How would this affect the position of equilibrium? Give a reason for your choice.
It would move to the
reason
[1]
(ii) Describe what you would observe.
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

236/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(d) Calculate the overall energy change for the reaction between iodine and chlorine using the
bond energy values shown.
I2 + Cl2 → 2ICl
Bond Energy / kJ per mol
I–I 151
Cl – Cl 242
I – Cl 208
Show your working.
[3]
(e) Draw a labelled energy level diagram for the reaction between iodine and chlorine using the
information in (d).
[2]
[Total: 10]

237/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
8 The alcohols form an homologous series.
(a) Give three characteristics of an homologous series.
[3]
(b) The following two alcohols are members of an homologous series and they are isomers.
CH3 ― CH2 ― CH2 ― CH2 ― OH and (CH3)2CH ― CH2 ― OH
(i) Explain why they are isomers.
[2]
(ii) Deduce the structural formula of another alcohol which is also an isomer of these
alcohols.
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

238/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
(c) Copper(II) oxide can oxidise butanol to liquid X, whose pH is 4.
mineral wool
soaked in butanol copper(II) oxide
heat
liquid X
formed by
oxidation of
butanol.
(i) Give the name of another reagent which can oxidise butanol.
[1]
(ii) Which homologous series does liquid X belong to?
[1]
(iii) State the formula of liquid X.
[1]

239/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
16
(d) The alcohol ethanol can be made by fermentation. Yeast is added to aqueous glucose.
C6H12O6(aq) → 2C2H5OH(aq) + 2CO2(g)
Carbon dioxide is given off and the mixture becomes warm, as the reaction is exothermic.
The graph shows how the rate of reaction varies over several days.
rate of
reaction
time
(i) Suggest a method of measuring the rate of this reaction.
[2]
(ii) Why does the rate initially increase?
[1]
(iii) Suggest two reasons why the rate eventually decreases.
[2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

240/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
17
BLANK PAGE

241/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
18
9 There are two types of polymerisation, addition and condensation.
(a) Explain the difference between these two types of polymerisation.
[2]
(b) Some plastics, formed by polymerisation, are non-biodegradable.
Describe two pollution problems that are caused by non-biodegradable plastics.
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

242/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
19
(c) The polymer known as PVA is used in paints and adhesives. Its structural formula is shown
below.
―CH2―CH―CH2―CH―
│ │
OCOCH3 OCOCH3
Deduce the structural formula of its monomer.
[1]
(d) A condensation polymer can be made from the following monomers.
HOOC(CH2)4COOH and H2N(CH2)6NH2
Draw the structural formula of this polymer.
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

243/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
20
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2017 0620/04/SP/20

244/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education
*4970
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
44
No Additional Materials are required.

*
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.

This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB19 03_0620_42/4RP
245/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Period 3 of the Periodic Table is shown.
Answer the following questions using only these elements.

State which element:
(a) is a gas at room temperature and pressure
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) forms a basic oxide with a formula of the form X2O
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) is made of atoms which have a full outer shell of electrons
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) forms an oxide which causes acid rain
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) is extracted from bauxite
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) forms an oxide which has a macromolecular structure
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(g) consists of diatomic molecules.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19

246/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 (a) The table gives information about some atoms or ions, A, B and C.
Complete the table.
number of number of electronic

charge
protons electrons structure
A 11 10 2,8
B 18 0
C 10 2,8 –1
[4]
(b) (i) Carbon is an element.
Define the term element.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
6C, 6C and 146C are isotopes of carbon.

12 13
(ii)
Complete the table.
number of protons number of neutrons
6C
12
6C
13
6C
14
[2]
[Total: 7]

247/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 Fluorine is a Group VII element. Fluorine forms compounds with metals and non-metals.
(a) redict the physical state of fluorine at room temperature and pressure.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fluorine exists as diatomic molecules.

fluorine. Sho outer shell electrons only.
F F
[2]
(c) Write a chemical e uation for the reaction bet een sodium and fluorine.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Explain why chlorine does not react ith a ueous sodium fluoride.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19

248/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(e) Tetrafluoromethane and lead II fluoride are fluorides of Group I elements. Some properties
of tetrafluoromethane and lead II fluoride are sho n in the table.
property tetrafluoromethane lead II fluoride

formula CF4
melting point / °C –184 855
boiling point / °C –127 1290
conduction of electricity when solid non-conductor non-conductor
conduction of electricity when molten non-conductor good conductor
(i) What is the formula of lead II fluoride
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What type of bonding is present bet een the atoms in tetrafluoromethane
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What type of structure does solid lead II fluoride have
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) E plain, in terms of attractive forces bet een particles, hy lead II fluoride has a much
higher melting point than tetrafluoromethane.
In your answer refer to the types of attractive forces between particles and their relative
strengths.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

249/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(f) Tetrafluoroethene is an unsaturated compound ith the formula C2F4.

Tetrafluoroethene is the monomer used to ma e the polymer poly tetrafluoroethene .
(i) What is meant by the term unsaturated
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe a test to sho that tetrafluoroethene is unsaturated.
test .......................................................................................................................................
observations ........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Dra the structure of a molecule of tetrafluoroethene. Sho all of the atoms and all of the
bonds.
[1]
(iv) Tetrafluoroethene can be polymerised to form poly tetrafluoroethene .
Draw one repeat unit of poly tetrafluoroethene . Sho all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[2]
(v) Deduce the empirical formula of:
tetrafluoroethene ................................................................................................................
poly tetrafluoroethene . ......................................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19

250/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 This question is about ethanoic acid, CH3COOH.
(a) Ethanoic acid is manufactured from methanol and carbon monoxide.
CH3 g C g CH3C g
The process is done at 200 °C and 30 atmospheres pressure.

The forward reaction is exothermic.
Complete the table using only the words increases, decreases or no change.
effect on the rate of effect on the equilibrium

the forward reaction yield of CH3C g
adding a catalyst no change
increasing the temperature
decreasing the pressure decreases

[4]
(b) How would you show that an aqueous solution of ethanoic acid is an acid without using an
indicator or measuring the p
State the reagent you would use and give the expected observations. Write a chemical equation
for the reaction that you describe.
reagent
....................................................................................................................................................
expected observations
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
chemical equation
....................................................................................................................................................
[3]

251/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(c) Ethanoic acid is a ea acid.
(i) What is meant by the term acid
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Why is ethanoic acid described as weak
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Ethanoic acid reacts with methanol to form an ester.
(i) State two conditions required for this reaction.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Draw the structure of the ester formed when ethanoic acid reacts with methanol. Show all
of the atoms and all of the bonds. Name the ester.
structure
name ...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(iii) Name an ester which is a structural isomer of the ester in (d)(ii).
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19

252/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 Titanium is e tracted from an ore called rutile. utile is an impure form of titanium IV) oxide, TiO2.
(a) utile is mi ed ith co e and heated in a furnace through hich chlorine gas is passed. The
product is gaseous titanium IV) chloride, TiCl 4.
TiO2 s 2C s 2Cl 2 g TiCl 4 g 2C g
The gaseous titanium IV) chloride produced is condensed into the liquid state. The
titanium IV) chloride is then separated from liquid impurities.
(i) Suggest the name of the process by hich li uid titanium IV) chloride could be separated
from the liquid impurities.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Carbon mono ide, C g , is also produced in the reaction.
Why should carbon monoxide not be released into the atmosphere
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the volume of chlorine gas, Cl 2 g , at room temperature and pressure, that reacts
completely with 400 g of TiO2 s using the follo ing steps.
TiO2 s 2Cl 2 g 2C s TiCl 4 g 2C g
Calculate the relative formula mass, Mr, of TiO2.
Mr of TiO2 = ..............................
Calculate the number of moles in 400 g of TiO2.
.............................. mol
Determine the number of moles of Cl 2 that react with 400 g of TiO2.
moles of Cl 2 = .............................. mol
Calculate the volume of Cl 2 that reacts with 400 g of TiO2.
volume of Cl 2 = .............................. dm3

[4]

253/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(c) Titanium IV) chloride, TiCl 4, is heated with an excess of magnesium, in an atmosphere of
argon.
(i) Balance the chemical equation for the reaction.
TiCl 4 ..... g Ti ..... gCl 2

[1]
(ii) Titanium IV) chloride can be reacted with sodium instead of magnesium.
The reaction bet een titanium IV) chloride and sodium is similar to the reaction between
titanium IV) chloride and magnesium.
Write a chemical e uation for the reaction bet een titanium IV) chloride and sodium.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest hy the reaction bet een titanium IV) chloride and magnesium is done in an
atmosphere of argon and not in air.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) fter titanium IV) chloride is heated with magnesium, the unreacted magnesium is removed
by adding an excess of dilute hydrochloric acid to the mixture.
The dilute hydrochloric acid also dissolves the magnesium chloride.

The dilute hydrochloric acid does not react with the titanium or dissolve it.
(i) Give two observations and write a chemical equation for the reaction that occurs when
dilute hydrochloric acid reacts with magnesium.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
chemical equation ...............................................................................................................

[3]
(ii) Name the process that is used to separate the titanium from the mixture after all the
magnesium has been removed.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Titanium does not react with the dilute hydrochloric acid or dissolve in it.
Suggest why titanium does not react with dilute hydrochloric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19

254/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(e) agnesium cannot be produced by electrolysis of a ueous magnesium chloride using inert
electrodes.
(i) Name the product formed at the negative electrode cathode during the electrolysis of
aqueous magnesium chloride.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest how magnesium can be produced from magnesium chloride by electrolysis.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 16]

255/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 This question is about transition elements.
(a) Transition elements are harder and stronger than Group I elements.
Describe two other differences in physical properties between transition elements and Group I
elements.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State one physical property of transition elements that is similar to Group I elements.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State two chemical properties of transition elements.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Cobalt is a transition element. nhydrous cobalt II) chloride is used to test for water.
State the colour change that occurs hen ater is added to anhydrous cobalt II) chloride.
from ................................................................... to ..................................................................

[2]
(e) Iron is a transition element.
(i) Which two substances react ith iron to form rust
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Which metal is used to galvanise iron
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19

256/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(f) The hull of a ship is made from steel mainly iron . etal bloc s are placed on the ship s hull to
prevent rusting.
water water
ship’s hull metal

block
se your no ledge of the reactivity series to e plain hy
magnesium is suitable to use as the metal bloc s

copper is not suitable to use as the metal bloc s.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(g) ust contains iron III) oxide.
Phosphoric acid, H3PO4, can be used to remove rust from an iron object and prevent further
rusting.
(i) Write a chemical e uation for the reaction bet een iron III) oxide and phosphoric acid to
form iron III) phosphate and water.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Iron III) phosphate is an insoluble salt.
Suggest ho the formation of iron III) phosphate prevents further rusting.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 15]

257/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19

258/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/F/M/19

259/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2019
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
260/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/F/M/19
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
5 99075 *

1 hour 15 minutes

IB19 06_0620_41/3RP
261/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/M/J/19

262/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
1 This question is about the structures of atoms and ions.
(a) Define the term proton number.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) Complete the table to show the number of protons, neutrons and electrons present in
24
atoms of 12 Mg and 12
26
Mg.

protons neutrons electrons
12Mg
24
12Mg
26
[2]
(ii) 24
What term is used to describe atoms of the same element, such as 12 Mg and 12
26
Mg?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) 24
Explain why the chemical properties of 12 Mg and 12
26
Mg are the same.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Complete the table to identify the atoms and ions which have the following numbers of protons,
neutrons and electrons.

11Na
23 +
11 12 10
4 5 4
17 20 18
[4]
(d) State the electronic structure of the following atom and ion.
Al ...............................
S2– ..............................
[2]
[Total: 13]

263/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
2 Z is a covalent substance. In an experiment, a sample of pure solid Z was continually heated for
11 minutes.
The graph shows how the temperature of the sample of pure Z changed during the first minutes.
240
220
200
180
160
140
temperature
/ °C 120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
time / minutes
(a) What is the melting point of pure Z?
.............................. °C [1]
(b) The sample of pure Z began to boil at minutes. It as boiled for 2 minutes.
Use this information to sketch on the grid how the temperature of the sample of pure Z changed
bet een minutes and 11 minutes. 1
(c) The sample of pure Z was continually heated between 2 minutes and 5 minutes.
Explain, in terms of attractive forces, why there was no increase in the temperature of the
sample of pure Z between 2 minutes and 5 minutes.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/M/J/19

264/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(d) Describe how the motion of particles of pure Z changed from 0 minutes to 2 minutes.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) The experiment was repeated using a solid sample of impure Z.
Suggest the differences, if any, in the melting point and boiling point of the sample of impure Z
compared to the sample of pure Z.
melting point ..............................................................................................................................
boiling point ...............................................................................................................................

[2]
(f) A sample of pure Z was allowed to cool from 120 °C to 20 °C. The total time taken was 8 minutes.
Starting from point , sketch on the grid how the temperature of the sample of pure Z changed
between 0 minutes and 8 minutes.
200
180
160
140
120
temperature
/ °C 100
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
time / minutes
[2]
[Total: 10]

265/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
3 Zinc and copper are elements next to each other in the Periodic Table.
(a) Zinc is obtained from zinc blende in a two-step process.
In step 1, zinc blende is converted into zinc oxide.
In step 2, zinc oxide is converted into zinc in a blast furnace.
Outline how each of these steps are done.
In your answer:
give one chemical equation for each step
describe how zinc is removed from the blast furnace in step 2.
step 1 ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
step 2 ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
removal of zinc in step 2 ...........................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) Name the alloy formed when zinc is mixed with copper.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Copper is a transition element. It can have variable oxidation states.
State two other chemical properties of transition elements which make them different from
Group I elements.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/M/J/19

266/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(d) A compound of copper can be used to test for water.
(i) State the full name of this compound of copper.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the colour change that occurs when water is added to this compound of copper.
from .............................................................. to ................................................................

[2]
(e) Aqueous potassium iodide reacts with aqueous copper(II) sulfate to produce iodine.
(i) Balance the chemical equation for this reaction.
KI + CuSO4 CuI + I2 + K2SO4

[2]
(ii) Deduce the charge on the copper ion in CuI.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) In terms of electron transfer, explain why copper is reduced in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Identify the reducing agent.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 16]

267/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
4 Ethanoic acid is a weak acid and hydrochloric acid is a strong acid.

Both ethanoic acid and hydrochloric acid dissociate in aqueous solution.
(a) (i) Define the term acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The chemical equation shows the changes which occur when the strong acid,
hydrochloric acid, is added to water.
HCl (aq) H+(aq) + Cl –(aq)
Complete the chemical equation to show the changes which occur when the weak acid,
ethanoic acid, is added to water.
CH3COOH(aq) .............................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A student does experiments to show that hydrochloric acid is a strong acid and ethanoic acid is
a weak acid. The student adds an excess of hydrochloric acid and an excess of ethanoic acid
to separate samples of lumps of calcium carbonate.
Only the identity of the acid is changed between the experiments. All other conditions are kept
the same.
(i) State two observations which would show that hydrochloric acid is a stronger acid than
ethanoic acid.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The student uses the same size container and checks that the pressure is the same for
each experiment.
State three other conditions which must be kept the same to ensure fair testing.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
3 ..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/M/J/19

268/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(c) Hydrochloric acid produces salts called chlorides.
Magnesium carbonate reacts with hydrochloric acid to produce magnesium chloride.
MgCO3 + 2HCl MgCl 2 + H2O + CO2
A student used 50.00 cm3 of 2.00 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid in an experiment to produce
magnesium chloride.
Calculate the mass, in g, of magnesium carbonate needed to react exactly with 50.00 cm3 of
2.00 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid using the following steps.
Calculate the number of moles of HCl present in 50.00 cm3 of 2.00 mol / dm3 HCl.
.............................. mol
Determine the number of moles of MgCO3 which would react with 50.00 cm3 of
2.00 mol / dm3 HCl.
.............................. mol
Calculate the relative formula mass, Mr, of MgCO3.
Mr of MgCO3 = ..............................
Calculate the mass of MgCO3 needed to react exactly with 50.00 cm3 of 2.00 mol / dm3 HCl.
mass = .............................. g
[4]

269/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(d) A student prepares crystals of magnesium chloride by adding an excess of

magnesium carbonate to 50.00 cm3 of 2.00 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid.
The student filters the mi ture and rinses the residue.
(i) Why does the student add an excess of magnesium carbonate?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Why does the student rinse the residue?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe how the student would obtain pure crystals of magnesium chloride from the
filtrate.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(e) Silver chloride, AgCl, is insoluble. It can be made by a precipitation reaction between aqueous
barium chloride and a suitable aqueous silver salt.
(i) What is meant by the term precipitate?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name a suitable silver salt to use to prepare silver chloride.

Complete the chemical equation to show the formation of insoluble silver chloride from
aqueous barium chloride and the silver salt you have named.
name of a suitable silver salt ..............................................................................................
BaCl 2 + ..................... ..................... + .....................

[3]
[Total: 22]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/M/J/19

270/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
5 The structures of five al enes, A, B, C, D and E, are shown.
A B C
H H H CH3 H CH2CH3
C C C C C C
H H H H H H
D E
H CH2CH2CH3 H CH2CH2CH2CH3
C C C C
H H H H
(a) What is the general formula of alkenes?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) What is the molecular formula of alkene D?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Predict which alkene, A, B, C, D or E, has the highest boiling point.

alkene .............................
explanation ................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Which alkene, A, B, C, D or E, diffuses most quickly?

alkene .............................
explanation ................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[2]

271/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
(e) A student added aqueous bromine to alkene C.
C
H CH2CH3
C C
H H
Describe the colour change seen and draw the structure of the product. Show all of the atoms
and all of the bonds.
colour change from ........................................................ to .....................................................
structure
[2]
(f) Two different alcohols can be produced from alkene B by an addition reaction.
B
H CH3
C C
H H
(i) Draw the structures of the two alcohols. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[2]
(ii) State the reagent and conditions needed to produce an alcohol from alkene B.
reagent ...............................................................................................................................
conditions ...........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/M/J/19

272/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(g) Alkene C can be converted into a polymer.
C
H CH2CH3
C C
H H
(i) What type of polymerisation occurs?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the name of the polymer formed.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Complete the chemical equation to show this polymerisation.
H CH2CH3
n C C
H H
[3]
(iv) State the empirical formula of the polymer formed.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
Total 1

273/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/M/J/19

274/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/M/J/19

275/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2019
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
276/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/M/J/19
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*8057
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes
55 5*

IB19 06_0620_42/3RP
277/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The names of eight substances are given.
aluminium oxide calcium oxide ethanol nitrogen
iron(III) oxide methane oxygen silicon(IV) oxide
Answer the following questions about these substances.

(a) the main constituent of natural gas
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) a reactant in respiration
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) the main constituent of bauxite
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) a product of photosynthesis
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) a greenhouse gas
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) a macromolecular solid.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19

278/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
11Na, 11Na 11Na are isotopes of sodium.

22 23
2 (a) and 24
(i) Describe how these sodium isotopes are the same and how they are different in terms of
the total number of protons, neutrons and electrons in each.
same ...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
different ...............................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Why do all three isotopes have an overall charge of zero?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Why do all three isotopes have the same chemical properties?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Why do sodium ions have a charge of +1?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Carbon is an element which exists in different forms.
(i) Name two forms of the element carbon that have giant covalent structures.
............................................................... and .............................................................. [1]
(ii) Name the oxide of carbon that is a toxic gas.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

279/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 This question is about phosphorus and compounds of phosphorus.
(a) Phosphorus has the formula P4. Some properties of P4 are shown.
melting point / °C 45
boiling point / °C 280
electrical conductivity non-conductor
solubility in water insoluble
(i) Name the type of bonding that exists between the atoms in a P4 molecule.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain, in terms of attractive forces between particles, why P4 has a low melting point.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why phosphorus is a non-conductor of electricity.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Phosphorus, P4, reacts with air to produce phosphorus(V) oxide, P4O10.
(i) Write a chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What type of chemical reaction is this?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Phosphorus(V) oxide, P4O10, is an acidic oxide.
Phosphorus(V) oxide, P4O10, reacts with aqueous sodium hydroxide to form a salt containing
the phosphate ion, PO43–. Water is the only other product.
Write a chemical equation for the reaction between phosphorus(V) oxide and aqueous
sodium hydroxide.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19

280/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(d) Phosphine has the formula PH3.

phosphine. Show outer shell electrons only.
H P H
[2]
(e) Phosphine, PH3, has a similar chemical structure to ammonia, NH3.
Ammonia acts as a base when it reacts with sulfuric acid.
(i) What is meant by the term base?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between ammonia and sulfuric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 13]

281/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 Methanol is made industrially by reacting carbon monoxide with hydrogen. The gases react at a
temperature of 250 °C and a pressure of 75 atmospheres.
CO(g) + 2H2(g) CH3OH(g)
(a) Suggest a source of hydrogen for this industrial process.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Complete the table using only the words increases, decreases or no change.
effect on the rate effect on the equilibrium

of the reverse reaction yield of CH3OH(g)
adding a catalyst no change
increasing the temperature increases
decreasing the pressure

[4]
(c) Methanol is a member of the homologous series of alcohols.
(i) State two general characteristics of a homologous series.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Draw the structures of two different alcohols, each containing three carbon atoms. Show
all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
Name these two alcohols.
name ...................................................... name ......................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19

282/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(iii) What term is used to describe compounds with the same molecular formula but different
structural formulae?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Alcohols react with carboxylic acids to produce esters.
(i) The structure of ester X is shown.
O
H C H H
O C C H
H H
Name ester X.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give the name of the carboxylic acid and the alcohol that react together to produce ester X.
carboxylic acid ....................................................................................................................
alcohol ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Ester Y is different from ester X but also has the formula C3H6O2.
Draw the structure of ester Y. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 17]

283/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 Copper(II) sulfate crystals, CuSO4.5H2O, are hydrated.
Copper(II) sulfate crystals are made by reacting copper(II) carbonate with dilute sulfuric acid.
The equation for the overall process is shown.
CuCO3 + H2SO4 + 4H2O CuSO4.5H2O + CO2
step 1 Powdered solid copper(II) carbonate is added to 50.0 cm3 of 0.05 mol / dm3 sulfuric acid
until the copper(II) carbonate is in excess.
step 2 The excess of copper(II) carbonate is separated from the aqueous copper(II) sulfate.
step 3 The aqueous copper(II) sulfate is heated until the solution is saturated.
step 4 The solution is allowed to cool and crystallise.
step 5 The crystals are removed and dried.
(a) Calculate the maximum mass of the copper(II) sulfate crystals, CuSO4.5H2O, that can form
using the following steps.
Calculate the number of moles of H2SO4 in 50.0 cm3 of 0.05 mol / dm3 H2SO4.
.............................. mol
Determine the number of moles of CuSO4.5H2O that can form.
.............................. mol
The Mr of CuSO4.5H2O is 250.
Calculate the maximum mass of CuSO4.5H2O that can form.
.............................. g
[3]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19

284/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(b) Steps 1–5 were done correctly but the mass of crystals obtained was less than the maximum
mass.
Explain why.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State two observations that would indicate that the copper(II) carbonate is in excess in step 1.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) When the reaction in step 1 is done using lumps of copper(II) carbonate instead of powder,
the rate of reaction decreases. All other conditions are kept the same.
Give a reason for this. Explain your answer in terms of particles.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Name a different substance, other than copper(II) carbonate, that could be added to dilute
sulfuric acid to produce copper(II) sulfate in step 1.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) Name the process used to separate the aqueous copper(II) sulfate from the excess of
copper(II) carbonate in step 2.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(g) The solution of aqueous copper(II) sulfate was heated until it was saturated in step 3.
(i) Suggest what is meant by the term saturated solution.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What evidence would show that the solution was saturated in step 3?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Why should the aqueous copper(II) sulfate not be heated to dryness in step 3?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 14]

285/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 The halogens are the elements in Group VII of the Periodic Table.
(a) Predict the physical state and colour of astatine at room temperature and pressure.
physical state .............................................................................................................................
colour .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) When chlorine reacts with aqueous potassium bromide a displacement reaction occurs.
(i) Describe the colour change of the solution.
from .............................................................. to ................................................................

[2]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Reactions occur when some aqueous solutions of halogens are added to aqueous solutions of
halides.
Use the key to complete the table to show the results of adding halogens to halides.
key
= reaction
= no reaction
halides
KCl (aq) KBr(aq) KI(aq)
Cl 2(aq) 
halogens
Br2(aq)
I2(aq)
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19

286/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
7 (a) Displacement reactions occur between metals and metal ions.
Displacement reactions can be used to determine the order of reactivity of metals such as
lead (Pb), nickel (Ni), and silver (Ag).
The ionic equation for a displacement reaction is shown.
Ni(s) + Pb2+(aq) Pb(s) + Ni2+(aq)
The ionic half-equations for this reaction are shown.
Ni(s) Ni2+(aq) + 2e–
Pb2+(aq) + 2e– Pb(s)
The ionic half-equations show that electrons are donated by nickel atoms and accepted by
lead ions.
(i) Identify the reducing agent in the displacement reaction. Give a reason for your answer.
reducing agent .....................................................................................................................
reason ..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) What is the general term given to the type of reaction in which electrons are transferred
from one species to another?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The ionic equation for another displacement reaction is shown.
Pb(s) + 2Ag+(aq) 2Ag(s) + Pb2+(aq)
Write the two ionic half-equations for this reaction.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Use the information in (a) and (b) to put the three metals lead, nickel and silver in order of
reactivity.
most reactive
least reactive
[1]

287/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
(d) Nickel is a transition element. Nickel is stronger than sodium.
Describe two other differences in the physical properties of nickel and sodium.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Predict one difference in the appearance of aqueous solutions of nickel compounds compared
to aqueous solutions of sodium compounds.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) Copper is refined (purified) by electrolysis. Nickel can be refined using a similar method.
(i) The diagram shows the refining of nickel by electrolysis.
Complete the labels in the boxes.
power
supply
+ –
anode made of cathode made of
.......................................... ..........................................
electrolyte of
..........................................
[3]
(ii) Indicate, by writing N on the diagram, where nickel is produced. [1]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19

288/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19

289/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19

290/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/M/J/19

291/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2019
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
292/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/M/J/19
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge nternational eneral Certificate of econdary ducation
*5201718844*
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
1 hour 15 minutes
o not use staples paper clips glue or correction uid.

This syllabus is regulated for use in ngland ales and Northern reland as a Cambridge nternational e el e el Certificate.
IB19 06_0620_43/4RP
293/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Atoms contain particles called electrons, neutrons and protons.
(a) Complete the table.
where the particle

particle relative mass relative charge
is found in an atom
1
orbiting the nucleus 1840
+1
in the nucleus
[3]
(b) How many electrons, neutrons and protons are there in the ion shown?
20Ca
44 2+
number of electrons ................................................
number of neutrons ................................................
number of protons ..................................................

[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/M/J/19

294/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 24
Magnesium exists as three isotopes, 12 Mg, 12
25
Mg and 12
26
Mg.
(a) State, in terms of the total numbers of electrons, neutrons and protons, one difference and
two similarities between these magnesium isotopes.
difference ...................................................................................................................................
similarity 1 ..................................................................................................................................
similarity 2 ..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) All isotopes of magnesium react with dilute hydrochloric acid to make hydrogen and a salt.
(i) Why do all isotopes of magnesium react in the same way?
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between magnesium and dilute hydrochloric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Describe a test for hydrogen.
test ......................................................................................................................................
result ...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Magnesium is a metal.
Describe the structure and bonding of metals. Include a labelled diagram in your answer.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[3]

295/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(d) Magnesium reacts with oxygen to form the ionic compound magnesium oxide.
(i) Complete the dot-and-cross diagrams to show the electronic structures of the ions in
magnesium oxide. Show the charges on the ions.
........ ........
Mg O
[3]
(ii) Magnesium oxide melts at 2853 °C.
Why does magnesium oxide have a high melting point?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why molten magnesium oxide can conduct electricity.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/M/J/19

296/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 (a) (i) Sodium is in Group I of the Periodic Table.
Describe two physical properties of sodium which are different from the physical properties
of transition elements such as copper.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Sodium reacts rapidly with water.
Give one observation made when sodium is added to water.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Some car airbags contain sodium azide.

When a car airbag is used the sodium azide, NaN3, decomposes.
The products are nitrogen and sodium.
The equation for the decomposition of sodium azide is shown.
2NaN3(s) 2Na(l) + 3N2(g)
Calculate the mass, in g, of sodium azide needed to produce 144 dm3 of nitrogen using the
following steps.
● Calculate the number of moles in 144 dm3 of N2 measured at room temperature and
pressure.
moles of N2 = .............................. mol
● Determine the number of moles of NaN3 needed to produce this number of moles of N2.
moles of NaN3 = .............................. mol
● Calculate the relative formula mass, Mr, of NaN3.
Mr = ..............................
● Calculate the mass of NaN3 needed to produce 144 dm3 of N2.
.............................. g
[4]

297/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(c) Some airbags contain silicon(IV) oxide.

When the airbag is used sodium oxide is formed.
ides can be classified as acidic amphoteric basic or neutral.
Classify each of these oxides:
sodium oxide .............................................................................................................................
silicon(IV) oxide. .......................................................................................................................

[2]
(d) Lead(II) azide is insoluble in water. Solid lead(II) azide can be made in a precipitation reaction
between aqueous lead(II) nitrate and aqueous sodium azide.
Lead(II) azide has the formula Pb(N3)2.
(i) Deduce the formula of the azide ion.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the chemical equation for the reaction between aqueous lead(II) nitrate and
aqueous sodium azide to form solid lead(II) azide and aqueous sodium nitrate. Include
state symbols.
Pb(NO3)2(aq) + ....... NaN3(aq) Pb(N3)2(.....) + ....... ....................(.....)

[2]
(iii) Describe how you could obtain a sample of lead(II) azide that is not contaminated with
any soluble salts from the reaction mixture.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) An organic compound made from sodium azide has the composition by mass: 49.5% carbon,
7.2% hydrogen and 43.3% nitrogen.
Calculate the empirical formula of the organic compound.
[3]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/M/J/19

298/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
Question 4 starts on the next page.

299/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
4 Solutions of ionic compounds can be broken down by electrolysis.
(a) Concentrated aqueous copper(II) chloride was electrolysed using the apparatus shown.
power
supply
– +
cathode made anode made

of platinum of platinum
concentrated aqueous
copper(II) chloride
The ionic half-equations for the reactions at the electrodes are shown.
negative electrode: Cu2+(aq) + 2e– Cu(s)
positive electrode: 2Cl –(aq) Cl 2(g) + 2e–
(i) Platinum is a solid which is a good conductor of electricity.
State one other property of platinum which makes it suitable for use as electrodes.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what would be seen at the positive electrode during this electrolysis.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State and explain what would happen to the mass of the negative electrode during this
electrolysis.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/M/J/19

300/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(iv) The concentrated aqueous copper(II) chloride electrolyte is green.
Suggest what would happen to the colour of the electrolyte during this electrolysis.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(v) Identify the species that is oxidised during this electrolysis.

species that is oxidised .......................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Metal objects can be electroplated with silver.
(i) Describe how a metal spoon can be electroplated with silver.

Include:
● what to use as the positive electrode and as the negative electrode
● what to use as the electrolyte
● an ionic half-equation to show the formation of silver.
You may include a diagram in your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
ionic half-equation ..............................................................................................................

[4]
(ii) Give one reason why metal spoons are electroplated with silver.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 13]

301/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
5 Carboxylic acids react with alcohols to form esters. The reaction is reversible.
The equation for the reaction between ethanoic acid and ethanol is shown.
CH3COOH + CH3CH2OH CH3COOCH2CH3 + H2O
(a) (i) What is the name of the ester formed in this reaction?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of the ester formed. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[1]
(b) The reaction between ethanoic acid and ethanol is exothermic.
Draw an energy level diagram for this reaction.
On your diagram label:

● the reactants and products
● the energy change of the reaction, ∆H.
energy
[3]
(c) Concentrated sulfuric acid is a catalyst for this reaction.
What is meant by the term catalyst ?
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/M/J/19

302/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(d) The rate of reaction can be increased by increasing the temperature.
Explain why increasing the temperature increases the rate of reaction.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(e) The reaction between ethanoic acid and ethanol reaches equilibrium.
(i) The reaction between ethanoic acid and ethanol is exothermic.
State and explain the effect, if any, of increasing the temperature on the amount of ester
at equilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State and explain the effect, if any, of removing water from the mixture on the amount of
ester at equilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 15]

303/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 (a) Two hydrocarbons have the structures shown.
hydrocarbon A hydrocarbon B
H H
H H H H H C H
H C C H
H C C C C C H
C C
H H H H H H
H H
(i) Why are these two compounds hydrocarbons?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Hydrocarbon B reacts in the same way as a typical alkane.
Describe a chemical test to tell the difference between hydrocarbon A and hydrocarbon B.
State the name of the reagent you would use and the result you would obtain with
hydrocarbon A and hydrocarbon B.
reagent ...............................................................................................................................
result with hydrocarbon A ...................................................................................................
result with hydrocarbon B ...................................................................................................

[3]
(b) Alkenes react with steam to form alcohols.

Compound C is an alcohol.
compound C
H H H H
H C C C C O H
H H H H
Draw the structure of the alkene which could be reacted with steam to make compound C.
[1]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/M/J/19

304/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(c) Alkenes can form polymers.
(i) What type of polymerisation occurs when alkenes form polymers?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Part of the structure of a polymer is shown.
CH3 H CH3 H CH3 H
C C C C C C
H CH3 H CH3 H CH3
Draw the structure of the alkene from which this polymer can be made. Show all of the
[1]
(iii) Polymers can undergo incomplete combustion to form carbon monoxide.
Complete the chemical equation for the incomplete combustion of poly(ethene). The only
carbon-containing product is carbon monoxide.
H H
C C + ..........O2 .................... + 2n H2O
H H n
[2]
(d) Part of the structure of a polyamide is shown.
H H H
C N C N C N
O O O
This polyamide is formed from identical monomers. Complete the diagram to show the structure
of one monomer. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[2]
[Total: 12]

305/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/M/J/19

306/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/M/J/19

307/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2019
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
308/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/M/J/19
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
ambridge nternational eneral ertificate of econdary ducation
*2338402729*
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
1 hour 15 minutes
o not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction uid.

his syllabus is regulated for use in ngland, ales and orthern reland as a ambridge nternational evel evel ertificate.
This document consists of 16 printed pages.
IB19 11_0620_41/3RP
309/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 This question is about ions and ionic compounds.
(a) Choose from the following list of ions to answer the questions.
Br – Ca2+ Cl – Cr3+ Cu2+
K+ Li+ Na+ SO32– SO42–
Each ion may be used once, more than once or not at all.
State which ion:
(i) gives a lilac colour in a ame test ................................................................................. [1]
(ii) forms a grey-green precipitate with aqueous ammonia ................................................ [1]
(iii) forms a white precipitate with aqueous sodium hydroxide ........................................... [1]
(iv) forms a cream precipitate with acidified aqueous silver nitrate .................................... [1]
(v) forms a white precipitate with acidified aqueous barium nitrate. .................................. [1]
(b) escribe how to do a ame test on a sample of a salt.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Magnesium phosphate contains magnesium ions, Mg2+, and phosphate ions, PO43–.
Deduce the formula of magnesium phosphate.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/O/N/19

310/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 (a) Sulfur exists as a number of different isotopes.
What is meant by the term isotopes?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) sulfide ion has the symbol shown.
34
16 S2–
(i) ow many neutrons are contained in this sulfide ion
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) ow is a sulfide ion, 2–

, formed from a sulfur atom?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Which element forms an ion with a 2+ charge that has the same number of electrons as
a S2– ion?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

311/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(c) The manufacture of sulfuric acid by the Contact process occurs in four stages.
stage 1 Molten sulfur is burned in air to produce sulfur dioxide gas.
stage 2 Sulfur dioxide is reacted with oxygen to form sulfur trioxide.
stage 3 Sulfur trioxide is combined with concentrated sulfuric acid to form oleum, H2S2O7.
stage 4 Oleum is added to water to form sulfuric acid.
(i) Complete the chemical equation for stage 1 by adding the appropriate state symbols.
S(.....) + O2(.....) SO2(.....) [1]
(ii) Name the catalyst used in stage 2 and state the temperature used.
catalyst ............................................
temperature ..................................... °C
[2]
(iii) Write chemical equations for the reactions in stage 3 and stage 4.
stage 3 ...............................................................................................................................
stage 4 ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Sulfur dioxide is a toxic gas.
(i) State one environmental reason why sulfur dioxide should not be released into the
atmosphere.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the test for sulfur dioxide.
test ......................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
observations .......................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/O/N/19

312/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(e) ulfur dioxide reacts with aqueous sodium sulfite to produce a compound with the following
composition by mass: 29.1% Na, 40.5% S and 30.4% O.
Calculate the empirical formula of this compound.
[Total: 16]

313/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
3 This question is about metals and metal oxides.
(a) Most metals have a high melting point.
State one other physical property that all metals have.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Iron often rusts.
Name the two substances, other than iron, that must be present for iron to rust.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(c) Iron can be obtained by heating iron(III) oxide with zinc powder.
Fe2O3 + 3Zn 2Fe + 3ZnO
(i) What can be deduced about the reactivity of zinc from this reaction?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The ionic equation for this reaction is shown.
2Fe3+ + 3Zn 2Fe + 3Zn2+
Identify the oxidising agent in this reaction. Explain your answer in terms of electron
transfer.
oxidising agent ....................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/O/N/19

314/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(d) Zinc oxide is amphoteric.
Describe two simple experiments to show that zinc oxide is amphoteric.

Name the reagents you would use and describe the observations you would make.
reagent 1 ...................................................................................................................................
observation ................................................................................................................................
reagent 2 ...................................................................................................................................
observation ................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 8]

315/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
4 Insoluble salts can be made by precipitation reactions.
A student mixed solutions of some soluble salts.
The results the student obtained are shown in the table.
second salt solution

Co(NO3)2(aq) AgNO3(aq) Pb(NO3)2(aq)
NaI(aq) no change yellow precipitate yellow precipitate
first salt
Na2CO3(aq) purple precipitate yellow precipitate white precipitate
solution
Na2SO4(aq) no change white precipitate white precipitate
All sodium salts are soluble in water.

Use only results from the table to answer the following questions.
(a) Name:
(i) an insoluble cobalt salt ................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) an insoluble yellow lead salt. ........................................................................................ [1]
(b) Write the chemical equation for the reaction in which silver carbonate is formed.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Write the ionic equation for the reaction in which lead(II) iodide is formed.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) Aqueous silver nitrate produces a yellow precipitate with both iodide ions and carbonate ions.
hen testing an un nown solution for iodide ions, the aqueous silver nitrate is acidified.
xplain why the aqueous silver nitrate is acidified.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/O/N/19

316/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 (a) Part of the structure of synthetic polymer A is shown.
CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3
C C C C C C
(i) What type of synthetic polymer is A?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Deduce the empirical formula of polymer A.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Draw the structure of the monomer from which polymer A is made.
[2]
(b) The formula C4H10 represents two different structural isomers.
(i) What is meant by the term structural isomers?
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Draw the structures of two structural isomers with the formula C4H10.
[2]
(iii) All structural isomers of C4H10 are ammable.
Write a chemical equation for the incomplete combustion of C4H10.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

317/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 Dilute hydrochloric acid, HCl (aq), reacts with aqueous sodium carbonate, Na2CO3(aq).
The chemical equation for the reaction is shown.
2HCl + Na2CO3 2NaCl + CO2 + H2O
(a) A 25.0 cm3 portion of Na2CO3 aq was placed in a conical as with a few drops of a suitable
indicator. It was titrated against HCl (aq) of concentration 0.180 mol /dm3.
20.0 cm3 of HCl (aq) was required to reach the end-point.
Calculate the concentration of the Na2CO3(aq), in mol / dm3, using the following steps.
● Calculate the number of moles of HCl used in the titration.
.............................. mol
● Calculate the number of moles of Na2CO3 contained in the 25.0 cm3 portion of Na2CO3(aq).
.............................. mol
● Calculate the concentration of the Na2CO3(aq) in mol / dm3.
.............................. mol / dm3

[3]
(b) In another experiment, the volume of carbon dioxide, CO2, produced was 48.0 cm3, measured
at room temperature and pressure.
How many moles of CO2 is this?
moles of CO2 = .............................. mol [1]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/O/N/19

318/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(c) A sample of concentrated hydrobromic acid, HBr(aq), was electrolysed using platinum
electrodes.
The concentration of the hydrobromic acid was 8.89 mol / dm3.
(i) Calculate the concentration of the HBr(aq) in g / dm3.
concentration of HBr(aq) = .............................. g / dm3 [1]
(ii) Explain why concentrated HBr(aq) can conduct electricity.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Magnesium is not a suitable material from which to make the electrodes.
Explain why.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Predict the product formed at the anode when concentrated HBr(aq) is electrolysed.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the cathode.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]

319/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
7 This question is about ethanol.
(a) Ethanol that is suitable for use as a fuel can be manufactured from sugars such as glucose,
C6H12O6, by a two-step process.
Describe how this can be done. In your answer, include:
● an equation for the reaction in which ethanol is formed

● the essential conditions for the reaction in which ethanol is formed
● the name of the process used to obtain ethanol that is pure enough to use as a fuel from
the reaction mixture.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/O/N/19

320/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(b) The equation for the complete combustion of ethanol is shown.
H H
H C C O H + 3 O O 2 O C O + 3 H O H
H H
Use the bond energies in the table to calculate the energy change, in kJ / mol, for the complete
combustion of ethanol.
bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol
C–C 347
C–H 413
C–O 358
C=O 805
O–H 464
O=O 498
● Energy needed to break bonds.
.............................. kJ
● Energy released when bonds are formed.
.............................. kJ
● Energy change for the complete combustion of ethanol.
energy change = .............................. kJ / mol

[3]

321/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
(c) Ethanol can be oxidised by hydrogen peroxide to form ethanal, CH3CHO. A catalyst for this
reaction is Fe3+.
(i) What is meant by the term catalyst ?
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The structure of ethanal is shown.
H C C O
H H

ethanal. Show outer shell electrons only.
H C C O
H H
[3]
(iii) The table gives the boiling points of ethanal and ethanol.
substance boiling point / °C

ethanal 20
ethanol 78
In terms of attractive forces between particles, suggest why ethanal has a lower boiling
point than ethanol.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/O/N/19

322/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
(d) Ethene gas reacts with steam to form gaseous ethanol.
C2H4(g) + H2O(g) CH3CH2OH(g)
The reaction can reach a position of equilibrium. The forward reaction is exothermic.
(i) State and explain the effect of increasing the pressure on the position of equilibrium.
All other conditions are unchanged.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Increasing the pressure of a gas increases its concentration.
State and explain the effect of increasing the pressure on the rate of the reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State and explain the effect of increasing the temperature on the position of equilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2019 0620/41/O/N/19

323/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2019
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
324/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/O/N/19
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*6351983657*
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes

IB19 11_0620_42/2RP
325/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The Periodic Table is very useful to chemists.
Refer only to elements with atomic numbers 1 to 36 in the Periodic Table provided when answering
Question 1.
(a) Use information from the Periodic Table provided to identify one element which:
(i) has atoms with exactly 9 protons ................................................................................. [1]
(ii) has atoms with 0 neutrons ............................................................................................ [1]
(iii) has atoms with exactly 23 electrons ............................................................................. [1]
(iv) has atoms with an electronic structure of 2,8,6 ............................................................ [1]
(v) forms ions with a charge of 3– containing 18 electrons ................................................ [1]
(vi) forms ions with a charge of 2+ containing 10 electrons ................................................ [1]
(vii) has a relative atomic mass that shows it has at least two isotopes. ............................. [1]
(b) State hich metal in the first elements
(i) is the Group I element which reacts most vigorously with water .................................. [1]
(ii) reacts with air to form lime. ........................................................................................... [1]
(c) ne element in the first elements is used as the fuel in a fuel cell.
(i) Name this element.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the overall chemical equation for the reaction which occurs when the element in
(c)(i) reacts in a fuel cell.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/O/N/19

326/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 The gases Ar, CO2, N2 and O2 are in clean, dry air.
CO, NO, NO2 and SO2 are gases commonly found in polluted air.
(a) What percentage of clean, dry air is N2?
Give your answer to the nearest whole number.
.............................. % [1]
(b) Name the process used to separate O2 from clean, dry air.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State one major adverse effect of the pollutant SO2.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) NO and NO2 are produced in car engines.
Describe how oxides of nitrogen form in a car engine.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Many cars have catalytic converters in their exhaust systems. In a catalytic converter, most of
the CO and NO formed in a car engine is changed into less harmful products.
Identify these products and state the metal catalyst used.
products .....................................................................................................................................
catalyst ......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(f) CO is formed from the incomplete combustion of fossil fuels such as methane.
Write a chemical equation to show the incomplete combustion of methane.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

327/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(g) The CO2 in air is part of the carbon cycle.
The scheme shows a simple representation of part of the carbon cycle.
carbon dioxide
in the air
A B
glucose found feeding

animals
in green plants
(i) State the scientific terms for each of process A and process B.
A .........................................................................................................................................
B .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Plants convert glucose into complex carbohydrates.
A unit of glucose can be represented as HO OH.
Complete the diagram to show the complex carbohydrate formed from three units of
glucose. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the linkages.
[2]
(iii) Complex carbohydrates break down to form simple sugars.
State two ways that complex carbohydrates can be broken down into simple sugars.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Name a suitable technique for separating and identifying the individual sugars formed
when complex carbohydrates are broken down.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/O/N/19

328/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 Ammonia is an important chemical.
(a) Ammonia is manufactured by the Haber process. The reaction is reversible.
(i) What is the sign for a reversible reaction?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the essential conditions for the manufacture of ammonia by the Haber process
starting from hydrogen and nitrogen. Include a chemical equation to show the reaction
which occurs.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [5]
(iii) Name one raw material which is a source of the hydrogen used in the Haber process.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Ammonia is a base and reacts with sulfuric acid to form the salt, ammonium sulfate.
(i) What is meant by the term base?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the industrial process used to manufacture sulfuric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between ammonia and sulfuric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

329/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(c) When aqueous ammonia is added to aqueous iron(II) sulfate a green precipitate is seen. This
green precipitate turns red-brown at the surface.
(i) Name the green precipitate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest why the green precipitate turns red-brown at the surface.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State what happens when an excess of aqueous ammonia is added to the green precipitate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/O/N/19

330/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(d) Ammonia reacts with oxygen as shown.
4NH3(g) + 5O2(g) 4NO(g) + 6H2O(g)
(i) Calculate the volume of oxygen at room temperature and pressure, in dm3, that reacts with
4.80 dm3 of ammonia.
volume = .............................. dm3 [3]
(ii) The chemical equation for the reaction can be represented as shown.
4 H N H + 5 O O 4 N O + 6 H O H
Use the bond energies in the table to calculate the energy change, in kJ / mol, which
occurs when one mole of NH3 reacts.
bond N–H O=O N=O O–H

bond energy in kJ / mol 391 498 587 464
Energy needed to break bonds.
.............................. kJ
Energy released when bonds are formed.
.............................. kJ
Energy change when one mole of NH3 reacts.

[4]
[Total: 22]

331/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
4 Many substances conduct electricity.
(a) Identify all the particles responsible for the passage of electricity in:
graphite ...............................................................................................................................
magnesium ribbon ..............................................................................................................
molten copper II) bromide. .................................................................................................

[4]
(b) A student used the following apparatus to electrolyse concentrated aqueous sodium chloride
using inert electrodes.
concentrated aqueous
sodium chloride
inert electrodes
+ –
(i) Suggest the name of a metal which could be used as the inert electrodes.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the gas formed at the positive electrode.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the negative electrode. Include
state symbols.
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iv) How, if at all, does the pH of the solution change during the electrolysis? Explain your
answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/O/N/19

332/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(c) A student used the following electrochemical cell.
The reading on the voltmeter was +1.10 V.
voltmeter
zinc electrode copper electrode
(i) Dra an arro on the diagram to sho the direction of electron flo . 1
(ii) Suggest the change, if any, in the voltmeter reading if the zinc electrode was replaced with
an iron electrode. Explain your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The zinc electrode was replaced with a silver electrode. The reading on the voltmeter was
–0.46 V.
Suggest why the sign of the voltmeter reading became negative.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 16]

333/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
5 Methanol, CH3OH, is a member of the homologous series of alcohols.
(a) Methanol can be made from methane in a two-step process.
step 1 Methane is reacted with chlorine gas to produce chloromethane, CH3Cl.
step 2 CH3Cl is reacted with sodium hydroxide to produce CH3OH and one other product.
(i) What conditions are needed in step 1?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the chemical equation for the reaction which occurs in step 1.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the type of organic reaction occurring in step 1.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Complete the chemical equation for step 2.
CH3Cl + NaOH CH3OH + .............................. [1]
(b) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of methanol.
H C O H
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/O/N/19

334/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(c) Methanol reacts with propanoic acid to form an ester with a molecular formula C4H8O2.
(i) Name the ester formed when methanol reacts with propanoic acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name one other substance formed when methanol reacts with propanoic acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Draw the structure of an ester which is a structural isomer of the ester named in (c)(i).
[3]
(iv) State the conditions needed to form an ester from a carboxylic acid and an alcohol.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2019 0620/42/O/N/19

335/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2019
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
336/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/O/N/19
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
9 33183*
1 hour 15 minutes

IB19 11_0620_43/2RP
337/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 (a) Atoms are made of smaller particles called electrons, neutrons and protons.
Complete the table.
particle relative charge relative mass

1
electron 1840
neutron
proton +1
[2]
(b) The table gives information about atoms and ions A, B and C.
Complete the table.

symbol
electrons neutrons protons
13Al
27
A 14 13
12Mg
25 2+
B 12
C 10 10 9
[6]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/O/N/19

338/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 The table shows the melting points, boiling points and electrical conductivities of six substances
D, E, F, G, H and I.

substance
/ °C / °C when solid when liquid
D 1610 2230 non-conductor non-conductor
E 801 1413 non-conductor good conductor
F –119 43 non-conductor non-conductor
G 1535 2750 good conductor good conductor
H 114 184 non-conductor non-conductor
I –210 –196 non-conductor non-conductor
Choose substances from the table which match the following descriptions. Each substance may be
used once, more than once or not at all.
(a) Which substance is a liquid at 25 °C? .................................................................................. [1]
(b) Which substance is a gas at 25 °C? .................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which three substances contain simple molecules?
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Which substance could be a metal? Give a reason for your answer.
substance ..................................................................................................................................
reason ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Which substance has a macromolecular structure? Give two reasons for your answer.
substance ..................................................................................................................................
reason 1 .....................................................................................................................................
reason 2 .....................................................................................................................................
[3]
(f) Which substance is an ionic solid? Give one reason for your answer.
substance ..................................................................................................................................
reason ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 12]

339/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 (a) Name the ore of aluminium which mainly consists of aluminium oxide.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Aluminium is produced by the electrolysis of aluminium oxide dissolved in molten cryolite.
waste gases
positive electrode
molten mixture of
negative electrode
aluminium oxide and cryolite
aluminium
(i) Give two reasons why the electrolysis is done using a molten mixture of aluminium oxide
and cryolite instead of molten aluminium oxide only.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Write ionic half-equations for the reactions occurring at the electrodes.
positive electrode ................................................................................................................
negative electrode ..............................................................................................................

[2]
(iii) The anodes are made of carbon and have to be replaced regularly.
Explain why the carbon anodes have to be replaced regularly.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/O/N/19

340/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(c) The positions of some common metals in the reactivity series are shown.
most reactive magnesium
aluminium
least reactive copper
(i) When magnesium is placed in aqueous copper(II) sulfate a displacement reaction occurs
immediately.
Write an ionic equation for the reaction. Include state symbols.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State two observations you would make when magnesium is placed in aqueous
copper(II) sulfate.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) When aluminium foil is added to aqueous copper(II) sulfate no immediate reaction takes
place.
Explain why.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Aluminium powder reacts with iron(III) oxide to produce aluminium oxide and iron.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 14]

341/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 This question is about phosphorus and compounds of phosphorus.
(a) A phosphorus molecule contains four phosphorus atoms only.
What is the formula of a phosphorus molecule?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Phosphorus reacts with chlorine gas to produce phosphorus(III) chloride, PCl 3.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between phosphorus and chlorine to produce
phosphorus(III) chloride, PCl 3.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of
phosphorus(III) chloride, PCl 3. Show outer shell electrons only.
Cl
Cl P Cl
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/O/N/19

342/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(c) Gaseous phosphorus(III) chloride, PCl 3, reacts with gaseous chlorine to form gaseous
phosphorus(V) chloride, PCl 5.
PCl 3(g) + Cl 2(g) PCl 5(g)
The chemical equation for this reaction can be represented as shown.
Cl Cl
Cl
Cl P Cl + Cl Cl P Cl
Cl
Cl
(i) Use the bond energies in the table to calculate the energy change, in kJ / mol, of the
reaction.

P– Cl 326
Cl – Cl 243
Energy needed to break bonds.
.............................. kJ
Energy released when bonds are formed.
.............................. kJ
Energy change of reaction.

[3]
(ii) Deduce whether the energy change for this reaction is exothermic or endothermic. Explain
your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

343/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(d) Under certain conditions the reaction reaches equilibrium.
PCl 3(g) + Cl 2(g) PCl 5(g)
State and explain the effect, if any, on the position of equilibrium if the pressure is increased.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Phosphine, PH3, is produced by the reaction between water and calcium phosphide, Ca3P2.
Ca3P2 + ......H2O ...........Ca(OH)2 + ......PH3 [2]
(f) The phosphonium ion, PH4+, is similar to the ammonium ion.
(i) State the formula of the ammonium ion. ....................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the formula of phosphonium iodide. ............................................................... [1]
(g) Calcium phosphate contains the phosphate ion, PO43–.
What is the formula of calcium phosphate?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(h) Phosphorus forms another compound with hydrogen with the following composition by mass:
P, 93.94%; H, 6.06%.
(i) Calculate the empirical formula of the compound.
(ii) The compound has a relative molecular mass of 66.
Deduce the molecular formula of the compound.
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/O/N/19

344/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 Nitrates such as ammonium nitrate are used as fertilisers.
The final stage in the production of ammonium nitrate is sho n in the e uation.
Ca(NO3)2 + 2NH3 + CO2 + H2O 2NH4NO3 + CaCO3
Calculate the maximum mass of ammonium nitrate that can be produced from 820 g of
calcium nitrate, Ca(NO3)2, using the following steps.
The relative formula mass, Mr, of calcium nitrate, Ca(NO3)2, = 164.
Calculate the number of moles of Ca(NO3)2 in 820 g.
.............................. mol
Deduce the number of moles of NH4NO3 produced.
.............................. mol
Calculate the Mr of NH4NO3.
Mr of NH4NO3 = ..............................
Calculate the maximum mass of ammonium nitrate produced.
.............................. g
[4]

345/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 This question is about sulfuric acid and substances that can be made from sulfuric acid.
(a) Sulfuric acid is a strong acid.
What is meant by the term strong acid ?
strong .........................................................................................................................................
acid ............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Dilute sulfuric acid and aqueous sodium hydroxide are used to make aqueous sodium sulfate,
Na2SO4(aq), or aqueous sodium hydrogen sulfate, NaHSO4(aq). The method includes use of
the following apparatus.
conical flask
25.0 cm3 of aqueous

sodium hydroxide
25.0 cm3 of aqueous sodium hydroxide of concentration 0.100 mol / dm3 was neutralised by
25.0 cm3 of dilute sulfuric acid of concentration 0.0500 mol / dm3. The equation for the reaction
is shown. This is reaction 1.
2NaOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq) Na2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(l) reaction 1
The same technique and the same solutions can be used to make aqueous
sodium hydrogen sulfate. The equation for the reaction is shown. This is reaction 2.
NaOH(aq) + H2SO4(aq) NaHSO4(aq) + H2O(l) reaction 2
Complete the table to calculate the volume of dilute sulfuric acid that reacts with 25.0 cm3 of
aqueous sodium hydroxide in reaction 2.
volume of 0.0500 mol / dm3 volume of 0.100 mol / dm3

dilute sulfuric acid in cm3 aqueous sodium hydroxide in cm3
reaction 1 25.0 25.0
reaction 2 25.0
[1]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/O/N/19

346/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(c) Aqueous sodium hydrogen sulfate, NaHSO4(aq), contains the ions Na+(aq), H+(aq)
and SO42–(aq).
Describe what you would see if the following experiments were done.
(i) flame test as done on a ueous sodium hydrogen sulfate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Solid copper(II) oxide was added to aqueous sodium hydrogen sulfate and the mixture
was warmed.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) A test can be done to show the presence of SO42– a by adding acidified a ueous barium chloride
or acidified a ueous barium nitrate.
(i) State the observation that would show that SO42– is present.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write an ionic equation for the reaction that occurs if SO42– is present. Include state
symbols.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

347/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
7 Addition polymerisation and condensation polymerisation are two types of polymerisation.
(a) Which functional group is present in all the monomers which are used to make addition
polymers?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Part of an addition polymer is shown.
C C C C C C
H H H H H H
(i) How many monomer units are needed to make the part of the addition polymer shown?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of the monomer that is used to make this addition polymer. Show all of
the atoms and all of the bonds.
Name the monomer.
name ...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State the empirical formula of:
the monomer ......................................................................................................................
the polymer. ........................................................................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/O/N/19

348/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(c) Complex carbohydrates are natural condensation polymers. They can be broken down into
colourless monomers hich can then be separated and identified.
X is a complex carbohydrate.
Starting with a sample of X, describe how to produce, separate, detect and identify the
monomers which make it up.

the name of the process used to break down X into its monomers
two types of substance that can be used to break down X
the name of the process used to separate the monomers
the method used to detect the monomers after they have been separated
the method used to identify the monomers after they have been separated and detected.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
(d) Synthetic polyamides are condensation polymers.
(i) Name a synthetic polyamide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Synthetic polyamides can be made by reacting carboxylic acids with amines.
Name the other substance that is produced in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 14]

349/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/O/N/19

350/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0620/43/O/N/19

351/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2019
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
352/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/O/N/19
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Cambridge International Examinations
* 1991
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes
551*
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.

The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB18 03_0620_42/3RP
353/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 This question is about gases.
(a) The following substances are gases at room temperature.
letter A B C D E F G H
substance SO2 Ar CO Cl 2 NH3 CO2 CH4 C 3H 8
Identify, by letter:
(i) a gas which combines with water to form acid rain ...................................................... [1]
(ii) two gases which exist as diatomic molecules .............................................................. [2]
(iii) a gas which bleaches damp litmus paper ..................................................................... [1]
(iv) a gas which is used as an inert atmosphere in lamps .................................................. [1]
(v) two gases which are found in clean dry air .................................................................. [2]
(vi) two gases hich are found in refinery gas. .................................................................. [2]
(b) NF3 has covalent bonds.
(i) What is a covalent bond?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
NF3.
F N F
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18

354/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(c) Air is a mixture. Nitrogen and oxygen are the two most common gases in air.
(i) What is meant by the term mixture?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the percentage of oxygen, to the nearest whole number, in clean dry air.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe the steps in the industrial process which enables nitrogen and oxygen to be
separated from clean dry air.
se scientific terms in your ans er.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iv) Which physical property of nitrogen and oxygen allows them to be separated?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 20]

355/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
2 Sodium chloride is a typical ionic compound.
(a) The diagram shows part of a lattice of sodium chloride.
(i) Complete the diagram to show the ions present. Use ‘+’ for Na+ ions and ‘–’ for Cl – ions.
One ion has been completed for you.
[2]
(ii) How many electrons does a chloride ion have?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Identify an element which has atoms with the same number of electrons as a sodium ion.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride is an important industrial process.
(i) What is meant by the term electrolysis?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name the products of the electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
3 ..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(iii) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction at the cathode.

....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18

356/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(c) Silver chloride can be made by reacting aqueous sodium chloride with aqueous silver nitrate.
The other product of the reaction is sodium nitrate. The chemical equation for the reaction is
shown.
NaCl (aq) + AgNO3(aq) AgCl (s) + NaNO3(aq)
A student attempted to make the maximum amount of sodium nitrate crystals. The process
involved three steps.
step 1 The student added aqueous sodium chloride to aqueous silver nitrate and stirred.
Neither reagent was in excess.
step 2 The student filtered the mi ture. The student then ashed the residue and added
the ashings to the filtrate.
step 3 The student obtained sodium nitrate crystals from the filtrate.
(i) Describe what the student observed in step 1.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Why was the residue washed in step 2?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give the names of the two processes which occurred in step 3.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) The student started with 20 cm3 of 0.20 mol / dm3 NaCl (aq).
Determine the amount of NaCl (aq) used.
amount of NaCl (aq) used = .............................. mol
The yield of NaNO3 crystals was 90%.
Calculate the mass of NaNO3 crystals made.
mass of NaNO3 crystals = .............................. g

[4]
(v) Write a chemical equation for the action of heat on sodium nitrate crystals.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 21]

357/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
3 Limestone rock is mainly calcium carbonate, CaCO3.
(a) The ‘limestone cycle’ is shown. Each step is numbered.
limestone step 1 lime

heat
calcium carbonate ...................................
CaCO3(s) ...................................
step 2
step 4
add
add CO2
limited water
limewater slaked lime
calcium hydroxide calcium hydroxide

step 3
Ca(OH)2(aq) add an excess Ca(OH)2(s)
of water
(i) Complete the box to give the chemical name and formula of lime. [2]
(ii) Which step involves a physical change?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What type of reaction is step 1?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Suggest how step 2 could be reversed.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Write a chemical equation for step 4.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) Explain why step 4 is a neutralisation reaction. Refer to the substances reacting in your
answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Dolomite is a similar rock to limestone. Dolomite contains magnesium carbonate, MgCO3.
Write a chemical equation for the reaction between magnesium carbonate and dilute nitric acid.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18

358/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(c) Forsterite is another rock which contains a magnesium compound.
A sample of forsterite has the following composition by mass: Mg, 2.73 g; Si, 1.58 g; O, 3.60 g.
Calculate the empirical formula of forsterite.
[Total: 12]

359/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
4 Ammonia is an important chemical.
(a) Ammonia is a base.
(i) In chemistry, what is meant by the term base?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a word equation to show ammonia behaving as a base.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Ammonia reacts with chlorine. The chemical equation is shown.
2NH3(g) + 3Cl 2(g) N2(g) + 6HCl (g)
(i) Calculate the volume of chlorine, measured at room temperature and pressure, needed to
react completely with 0.68 g of ammonia.
volume of chlorine = .............................. cm3 [3]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18

360/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(ii) The chemical equation can be represented as shown.
2 H N H + 3 Cl Cl N N + 6 H Cl
Use the bond energies in the table to determine the energy change, H, for the reaction
between ammonia and chlorine.
bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol
N–H 390
Cl –Cl 240
N N 945
H–Cl 430
energy needed to break bonds
.............................. kJ
energy released when bonds are formed
.............................. kJ
energy change, H, for the reaction between ammonia and chlorine
.............................. kJ
[3]
(iii) Is the reaction endothermic or exothermic? Explain your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

361/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(c) Ammonia reacts with oxygen at high temperatures in the presence of a suitable catalyst to
form nitric oxide, NO.
4NH3(g) + 5O2(g) 4NO(g) + 6H2O(g)
(i) Explain how this chemical equation shows ammonia acting as a reducing agent.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest a suitable catalyst for the reaction from the list of metals. Give a reason for your
answer.
aluminium calcium platinum potassium sodium
suitable catalyst ..................................................................................................................
reason .................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18

362/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
5 Alcohols are a ‘family’ of organic molecules which have the same general formula.
(a) What is the name given to any ‘family’ of organic molecules which have the same general
formula and similar chemical properties?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Give the general formula of alcohols.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Propan-1-ol can be made from propene.
(i) Name the reagent and give the conditions needed to convert propene into propan-1-ol.
reagent ...............................................................................................................................
conditions ...........................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the complete combustion of propan-1-ol.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) A simple sugar can be represented as shown.
H O O H
Simple sugars can be polymerised to make more complex carbohydrates.
(i) Complete the diagram to show part of a carbohydrate polymer made from the simple
sugar shown.
[2]
(ii) Name the chemical process which occurs when a carbohydrate polymer is broken down
into simple sugars.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What conditions are needed for this process to occur?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

363/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
(e) Chromatography can be used to identify simple sugars in a mixture.
A student analysed a mixture of simple sugars by chromatography. All the simple sugars in the
mixture were colourless.
(i) What is the name given to the type of substance used to identify the positions of the simple
sugars on the chromatogram?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The student calculated the Rf value of a spot on the chromatogram.
Complete the expression for the Rf value of the spot.
Rf =
[1]
(iii) How could a student identify a simple sugar from its Rf value?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Sometimes not all the substances in a mi ture can be identified from the chromatogram
produced.
Explain why this may happen.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18

364/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18

365/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18

366/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/F/M/18

367/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
368/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/F/M/18
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
* 71151775 *
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
1 hour 15 minutes

IB18 06_0620_41/5RP
369/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Substances can be classified as elements, compounds or mi tures.
(a) What is meant by the term compound ?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) i tures can be separated by physical processes.
se uence of physical processes can be used to separate common salt sodium chloride
from a mi ture containing sand and common salt only.
Give the order and the correct scientific term for the physical processes used to separate the
common salt from the mi ture.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
3 .................................................................................................................................................
[4]
The boiling points of four different alcohols, A, B, C and D, are sho n.
alcohol A B C D
boiling point / °C 56 78 122 160
(c) student suggested that the apparatus sho n could be used to separate the mi ture of
alcohols.
fractionating column X
mixture of
hot water alcohols
A, B, C and D
electric heater
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/M/J/18

370/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(i) pparatus X needs to have cold ater flo ing through it.
Dra an arro on the diagram to sho here the cold ater enters apparatus X.
Name apparatus X.
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) art of the fractionating column is missing. This means that the e periment ill not or .
Dra on the diagram the part of the fractionating column hich is missing.
E plain hy the e periment ill not or ith this part of the fractionating column
missing.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Suggest hy a unsen burner is not used to heat the flas .
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) hot ater bath cannot be used to separate alcohols C and D.
E plain hy.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
Total 1

371/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
2 lerovium, l, atomic number 11 , as first made in research laboratories in 1 .
(a) lerovium as made by bombarding atoms of plutonium, u, atomic number , ith atoms of
element Z.
The nucleus of one atom of plutonium combined ith the nucleus of one atom of element Z.
This formed the nucleus of one atom of flerovium.
Suggest the identity of element Z.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) In hich period of the eriodic Table is flerovium
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) redict the number of outer shell electrons in an atom of flerovium.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) T o isotopes of flerovium are 286Fl and 2 Fl. The nuclei of both of these isotopes are unstable
and emit energy hen they split up.
(i) State the term used to describe isotopes ith unstable nuclei.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the table to sho the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in the atoms of
the isotopes sho n.
isotope number of protons number of neutrons number of electrons

286
Fl
2
Fl
[2]
(e) nly a relatively small number of atoms of flerovium have been made in the laboratory and the
properties of flerovium have not yet been investigated.
It has been suggested that flerovium is a typical metal.
(i) Suggest two physical properties of flerovium.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest one chemical property of flerovium o ide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
Total ]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/M/J/18

372/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 This uestion is about iron.
(a) Three of the ra materials added to a blast furnace used to e tract iron from hematite are
co e, hematite and limestone.
Name one other ra material added to the blast furnace.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) series of reactions occurs in a blast furnace during the e traction of iron from hematite.
Describe these reactions.

Include
one chemical e uation for the reduction of hematite
one chemical e uation for the formation of slag.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(c) The iron e tracted from hematite using a blast furnace is impure.
Identify the main impurity in this iron and e plain ho it is removed in the steel ma ing process.
main impurity .............................................................................................................................
ho it is removed .......................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[3]
Total

373/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 This uestion is about masses, volumes and moles.
(a) Which term is defined by the follo ing statement
The average mass of naturally occurring atoms of an element

on a scale where the 12C atom has a mass of exactly 12 units.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) utane, C4H10, has a relative molecular mass of .

otassium fluoride, , has a relative formula mass of .
E plain hy the term relative molecular mass can be used for butane but cannot be used for
potassium fluoride.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) . g sample of gaseous element Y occupies . cm3 at room temperature and pressure.
Determine the number of moles of element Y in . cm3.
moles of element Y ............................. mol
Calculate the relative molecular mass of element Y and hence suggest the identity of
element Y.
relative molecular mass .............................
identity of element Y .............................

[3]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/M/J/18

374/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(d) 1. g sample of phosphorus as burned and formed . g of an o ide of phosphorus.
Calculate the empirical formula of this o ide of phosphorus.
empirical formula .............................
(e) nother o ide of phosphorus has the empirical formula 2O3.

ne molecule of this o ide of phosphorus contains four atoms of phosphorus.
Calculate the mass of one mole of this o ide of phosphorus.
mass ............................. g 2
Total 12

375/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 (a) The table gives some chemical properties of transition elements and their compounds, and of
Group I elements and their compounds.
chemical property transition elements Group I elements

ability to act as catalysts yes no
e ist as coloured compounds yes no
(i) What is meant by the term catalyst?
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give one other chemical property sho n by transition elements hich is not sho n by
Group I elements.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Give two physical properties sho n by transition elements hich are not sho n by Group I
elements.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The energy level diagram sho s the energy profile for the reaction bet een inc and dilute
sulfuric acid.
energy Zn(s) + H2SO4(aq)
(i) Complete the diagram by adding the formulae of the products. Include state symbols.
(ii) Dra an arro on the diagram to represent the activation energy. 1
(iii) Is the reaction endothermic or e othermic E plain your ans er.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/M/J/18

376/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(d) The reaction bet een inc and dilute sulfuric acid can be catalysed by the addition of a ueous
copper II sulfate.
n the diagram, add the energy profile for the catalysed reaction.
energy Zn(s) + H2SO4(aq)
[1]
(e) student electrolyses a ueous copper II sulfate using the apparatus sho n.
power supply
+ –
carbon electrodes
aqueous
copper(II) sulfate
ygen gas forms at the positive electrode anode .
(i) Write an ionic half e uation for the reaction at the negative electrode cathode . Include
state symbols.
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Describe hat the student observes at the negative electrode.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give two other observations hich the student ma es during the electrolysis.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) What difference ould the student observe at the positive electrode if the a ueous
copper II sulfate ere replaced by concentrated a ueous copper II chloride
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
Total 1

377/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 The table sho s the structures of four hydrocarbons.
P Q R S
CH3–CH3 CH2=CH2 CH2=CH–CH3 CH2=CH–CH2–CH3
(a) Why are compounds P, Q, R and S no n as hydrocarbons
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Compound P is saturated.
What is meant by the term saturated ?
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Compound P undergoes a substitution reaction ith chlorine.
(i) What is meant by the term substitution reaction?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State a condition re uired for this reaction to occur.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write a chemical e uation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Compound R undergoes an addition reaction ith bromine.
(i) Why is this reaction an addition reaction
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) compound containing bromine is formed in this reaction.
Dra the structure of this compound. Sho all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[1]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/M/J/18

378/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(e) Dra the structure of an unbranched isomer of compound S. Sho all of the atoms and all of
the bonds. Name this unbranched isomer of compound S.
structure
name ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) Compound Q undergoes polymerisation.
(i) Name the polymer formed.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the chemical e uation to sho the polymerisation of compound Q.
n CH2=CH2
[2]
(g) mino acids undergo polymerisation to form proteins. art of a protein molecule ith the
lin ages missing is sho n.
Dra the lin ages on the diagram. Sho all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
H O
N C
[2]
(h) The structure sho s an ester.
CH3 CH2 CH2 C
O CH2 CH3
Write the ord e uation for a reaction hich could be used to ma e this ester.
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
Total 1
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/M/J/18

379/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
380/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/M/J/18
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
* 1 7966 5 *
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes

This document consists of 11 printed pages and 1 blank page.
IB18 06_0620_42/3RP
381/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
(a) to obtain water from aqueous sodium chloride
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) to produce lead from molten lead(II) bromide
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) to separate an insoluble solid from a liquid
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) to separate the components of petroleum
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) to separate a mixture of coloured dyes.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18

382/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 This question is about the elements in Period 3 of the Periodic Table.
For each of the following, identify a Period 3 element which matches the description. Each element
may be used once, more than once or not at all.
State which Period 3 element:
(a) forms an oxide with a macromolecular structure
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) is extracted from the ore bauxite
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) is soft, metallic and stored in oil
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) is a green gas at room temperature and pressure
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) provides an inert atmosphere in lamps
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) forms two different oxides during the Contact process
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(g) is non-metallic and an important component of fertilisers.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
3 Complete the following table.
number of number of number of number of

particle
protons electrons neutrons nucleons
11Na
23
11 11 23
................
17Cl
37 –
20
................ ................ ................
56 26 24 30 56
26.............
[6]
[Total: 6]

383/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
4 Potassium reacts with bromine at room temperature to form potassium bromide.
(a) Write a chemical equation for this reaction. Include state symbols.
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Potassium bromide exists as an ionic lattice.

Potassium bromide does not conduct electricity when solid but does conduct electricity when
molten.
(i) What is meant by the term ionic lattice?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why potassium bromide does not conduct electricity when solid but does conduct
electricity when molten.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Concentrated aqueous potassium bromide is an electrolyte.
(i) What is meant by the term electrolyte?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe the electrolysis of concentrated aqueous potassium bromide.
Include:
an ionic half-equation for the reaction at the cathode
the name of the product at the anode
the name of the potassium compound formed.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [4]
(iii) When molten potassium bromide is electrolysed, the product at the cathode is different.
Name the product at the cathode when molten potassium bromide is electrolysed.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18

384/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(d) Iodine reacts with chlorine to form iodine monochloride, ICl, as the only product.
(i) Write a chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of

iodine monochloride. Show outer shell electrons only.
[2]
(e) Potassium bromide has a melting point of 734 °C.

Iodine monochloride has a melting point of 27 °C.
In terms of attractive forces, explain why there is a large difference between these melting
points.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(f) When chlorine gas is passed through aqueous potassium bromide, a redox reaction occurs.
The ionic equation is shown.
Cl 2 + 2Br – 2Cl – + Br2
(i) Write an ionic half-equation showing what happens to the chlorine molecules, Cl 2, in this
reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the bromide ions, Br –, act as reducing agents in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 23]

385/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
5 Hydrogen and iodine react together in a reversible reaction. Hydrogen iodide is formed.
H2(g) + I2(g) 2HI(g)

colourless purple colourless
gas gas gas
A gas syringe containing an equilibrium mixture of hydrogen, iodine and hydrogen iodide gases
was sealed and heated to 250 °C. The equilibrium mixture was a pale purple colour.
equilibrium mixture of hydrogen,

iodine and hydrogen iodide
end blocked
(a) What is meant by the term equilibrium?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The plunger of the gas syringe was pressed in while the end of the gas syringe was blocked.
This increased the pressure. The position of the equilibrium did not change. The colour of the
gaseous mixture turned darker purple.
(i) Give a reason why the position of the equilibrium did not change.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest why the gaseous mixture turned darker purple, even though the position of the
equilibrium did not change.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The temperature of the gas syringe was increased to 300 °C.
(i) What happened to the position of the equilibrium when the temperature of the gas syringe
was increased from 250 °C to 300 °C?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What happened to the rate of the forward reaction and the rate of the backward reaction
when the temperature of the gas syringe was increased from 250 °C to 300 °C?

[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18

386/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
6 (a) All sodium salts are soluble in water. All nitrates are soluble in water. Barium carbonate is
insoluble in water.
Describe how you would make a pure, dry sample of barium carbonate by precipitation.
Include:
the names of the starting materials
full practical details
a chemical equation.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) Nitrates decompose when heated.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the decomposition of sodium nitrate when it is heated.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The unbalanced chemical equation for the decomposition of hydrated copper(II) nitrate
crystals is shown.
2Cu(NO3)2.3H2O(s) .....CuO(s) + ......NO2(g) + O2(g) + ......H2O(g)

[2]
(iii) When the hydrated copper(II) nitrate crystals are heated, steam is produced. When the
steam condenses on a cool surface, it turns into a colourless liquid.
Anhydrous cobalt(II) chloride is used to show that the colourless liquid contains water.
How does the colour of the anhydrous cobalt(II) chloride change?
from ............................................................... to ...............................................................

[2]
(iv) How would the student test to determine if the water produced in (b)(iii) is pure?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]

387/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
7 Many organic compounds, such as alcohols, carboxylic acids and esters, contain the elements
carbon, hydrogen and oxygen only.
(a) Compound R has the following composition by mass: C, 60.00%; H, 13.33%; O, 26.67%.
Calculate the empirical formula of compound R.
(b) Compound S has the empirical formula C2H4O and a relative molecular mass of 88.
Calculate the molecular formula of compound S.
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18

388/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(c) Compounds T and V both have the molecular formula C3H6O2.
Compound T produces bubbles of carbon dioxide gas when it is added to aqueous

sodium carbonate.
Compound V is an ester.
(i) What is the name given to compounds with the same molecular formula but different
structures?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structures of compounds T and V. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
compound T
compound V
[2]
(iii) All compounds with the molecular formula C3H6O2 can undergo complete combustion in
an excess of oxygen.
C3H6O2 + ........................ ........................ + ........................

[2]
(d) Compound W has the molecular formula C2H6O. Compound W reacts when heated with
ethanoic acid and a catalyst to produce a sweet-smelling liquid.
(i) Give the name of the homologous series to which compound W belongs.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of compound W. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[1]

389/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(e) Alkanes and alkenes are hydrocarbons.
(i) What is meant by the term hydrocarbon?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the general formula of:
alkanes ...............................................................................................................................
alkenes ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) Ethanol can be produced from long-chain alkanes as shown.
step 1 step 2
long-chain alkane ethene ethanol
Describe the two-stage manufacture of ethanol from the long-chain alkane octane, C8H18.
Include:
the names of the types of chemical reactions that occur
reaction equations
reaction conditions.
step 1 ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
step 2 ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18

390/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/M/J/18

391/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
392/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/M/J/18
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*6
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
9193737*
1 hour 15 minutes

IB18 06_0620_43/4RP
393/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The following are the symbols and formulae of some elements and compounds.
Ar Ca(OH)2 Cl 2 CO2 Cu Fe SO2 V2O5
Answer the following questions using only the elements or compounds in the list.
Each element or compound may be used once, more than once or not at all.
State which element or compound is used:
(a) to kill bacteria in drinking water ........................................................................................... [1]
(b) as a food preservative ......................................................................................................... [1]
(c) as an electrical conductor in cables ..................................................................................... [1]
(d) as an inert atmosphere in lamps ......................................................................................... [1]
(e) to neutralise excess acidity in soil ....................................................................................... [1]
(f) as a catalyst in the Contact process. ................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/M/J/18

394/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 (a) 29
Al is a radioactive isotope of aluminium. The only non-radioactive isotope of aluminium is
27
Al.
(i) Describe, in terms of protons, neutrons and electrons, how the isotopes 29Al and 27Al are
similar and how they are different.
how they are similar ............................................................................................................
how they are different .........................................................................................................

[2]
13Al
27
(ii) Complete the table to show the number of nucleons, neutrons and electrons in an 3+
ion.
13Al
number in 27 3+
nucleons
neutrons
electrons
[3]
(b) Aluminium is extracted from its ore by electrolysis.
(i) Name the main ore of aluminium.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Why is aluminium not extracted from its ore by reduction with carbon?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The main ore of aluminium contains aluminium oxide. Aluminium oxide is dissolved in
molten cryolite before it is electrolysed.
Give two reasons, other than cost, why cryolite is used.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]

395/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(iv) The reaction at the anode during the extraction of aluminium by electrolysis is shown.
2O2– O2 + 4e–
Is this process oxidation or reduction?

Give a reason for your answer.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) During the extraction of aluminium by electrolysis, carbon dioxide is formed at the anode.
Explain how carbon dioxide is formed at the anode.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) When a piece of zinc metal is added to copper(II) sulfate solution there is an immediate
reaction.
Zn + CuSO4 ZnSO4 + Cu
When a piece of aluminium metal is added to copper(II) sulfate solution the initial reaction is
very slow.
(i) Explain why zinc metal reacts with copper(II) sulfate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What type of reaction is this?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the initial reaction between aluminium metal and copper(II) sulfate is very
slow.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/M/J/18

396/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 Cobalt is a transition element. Potassium is in Group I of the Periodic Table.
(a) State one physical property that is similar for cobalt and potassium.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) State one physical property that is different for cobalt and potassium.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how the physical property given in (b)(i) is different for cobalt compared to
potassium.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) When a small piece of potassium is added to cold ater, the potassium floats and disappears
as it reacts.
Give two other observations that would be made when a small piece of potassium is added to
cold water.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Cobalt reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid to make the salt cobalt(II) chloride. Bubbles of
hydrogen gas are produced.
(i) Describe a test for hydrogen.
test ......................................................................................................................................
result ...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The rate of reaction of cobalt with dilute hydrochloric acid can be made faster by heating
the acid or by increasing its concentration.
State one other way to make the rate of reaction faster.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Use collision theory to explain how heating the dilute hydrochloric acid makes the rate of
reaction faster.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

397/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(e) When cobalt(II) chloride is added to water an equilibrium is established.
[CoCl 4]2– + 6H2O [Co(H2O)6]2+ + 4Cl –

blue pink
(i) A student adds water to a blue solution containing [CoCl 4]2– ions.
Describe what the student observes. Give a reason for your answer in terms of the position
of the equilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Another student cools a blue solution containing [CoCl 4]2–. The blue solution turns pink.
What does this information indicate about the forward reaction?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Another compound of cobalt is Co(OH)3.
Deduce the charge on the cobalt ion in Co(OH)3.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/M/J/18

398/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 Ethanol is a member of the homologous series of alcohols.
(a) Give two characteristics of members of a homologous series.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The structure of ethanol is shown.
H H
H C C O H
H H

ethanol. Show outer shell electrons only.
H H
H C C O H
H H
[2]
(c) Ethanol can be produced by the catalytic addition of steam to ethene or by the fermentation of
glucose.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the production of ethanol by the catalytic addition of steam
to ethene.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the production of ethanol by the fermentation of glucose,
C6H12O6.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State one advantage of producing ethanol by the catalytic addition of steam to ethene.
Your answer must not refer to cost.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) State one advantage of producing ethanol by the fermentation of glucose.

Your answer must not refer to cost.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

399/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(d) Ethanol can be oxidised to ethanoic acid.
State the chemical reagent needed to oxidise ethanol to ethanoic acid.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) Ethanoic acid reacts with ethanol in the presence of an acid catalyst. The products are an
organic compound and water.
(i) Draw the structure of the organic compound formed. Show all of the atoms and all of the
bonds.
[2]
(ii) State the name of the organic compound formed.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Which homologous series does the organic compound formed belong to?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Ethanoic acid, CH3COOH, is a weak acid. It reacts with copper(II) carbonate to form the salt
copper(II) ethanoate, Cu(CH3COO)2.
(i) What is meant by the term weak when applied to acids?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how a crystalline sample of copper(II) ethanoate can be prepared starting with
ethanoic acid and copper(II) carbonate.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Write the word equation for the reaction between ethanoic acid and copper(II) carbonate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/M/J/18

400/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 (a) Nickel(II) iodide crystals are hydrated. A sample of hydrated nickel(II) iodide crystals has the
following composition by mass: Ni, 14.01%; I, 60.33%; H, 2.85%; O, 22.81%.
Calculate the empirical formula of the hydrated nickel(II) iodide crystals.
(b) Molten nickel(II) iodide can be electrolysed using the apparatus shown.
power supply
copper wires
platinum
electrodes
molten
nickel(II) iodide
During electrolysis, charge is transferred through the copper wires and through the molten
nickel(II) iodide.
(i) Name the type of particles which transfer charge through the copper wires.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the type of particles which transfer charge through the molten nickel(II) iodide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Predict the products of the electrolysis of molten nickel(II) iodide. Write an ionic
half-equation for the formation of one of these products.
products ...............................................................................................................................
ionic half-equation ..............................................................................................................

[3]

401/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(c) A student electrolysed copper(II) sulfate solution using the two sets of apparatus shown.
power supply power supply
carbon copper
electrodes electrodes
copper(II) sulfate copper(II) sulfate

solution solution
apparatus A apparatus B
In apparatus A the student used carbon electrodes.

In apparatus B the student used copper electrodes.
The student made the following observations.
apparatus A apparatus B
The mass of the negative electrode increased. The mass of the negative electrode increased.
The mass of the positive electrode stayed the same. The mass of the positive electrode decreased.
Bubbles were seen at the positive electrode. No bubbles were seen at the positive electrode.
(i) Explain why the mass of the negative electrode increased in both sets of apparatus.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the gas that formed the bubbles seen in apparatus A.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the mass of the positive electrode decreased in apparatus B.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/M/J/18

402/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(iv) Suggest what happens to the colour of the solution in apparatus A and apparatus B as the
electrolysis progresses.
colour of the solution in apparatus A ..................................................................................
colour of the solution in apparatus B ..................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 13]

403/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 Calcium chlorate(V), Ca(Cl O3)2, is made by reacting calcium hydroxide with chlorine gas.
6Ca(OH)2 + 6Cl 2 Ca(Cl O3)2 + 5CaCl 2 + 6H2O
(a) 8.88 g of calcium hydroxide and 7200 cm3 of chlorine gas are mixed together.
(i) How many moles is 8.88 g of calcium hydroxide?
.............................. mol [2]

(ii) How many moles of chlorine gas is 7200 cm ? 3
.............................. mol [1]
(iii) What is the maximum number of moles of calcium chlorate(V) that can be made from
8.88 g of calcium hydroxide and 7200 cm3 of chlorine gas?
.............................. mol [1]
(iv) What is the maximum mass of calcium chlorate(V) that can be made from 8.88 g of
calcium hydroxide and 7200 cm3 of chlorine gas?
.............................. g [2]
The experiment is repeated using different amounts of calcium hydroxide and chlorine gas.
The maximum mass of calcium chlorate(V) that can be made in the experiment is 4.84 g.
(v) The actual mass of calcium chlorate(V) made in the experiment is 3.63 g.
Calculate the percentage yield.
percentage yield = .............................. % [1]
(b) Calcium chlorate(V) undergoes thermal decomposition.
The only products are calcium chloride and a colourless gas.
(i) What must be done to calcium chlorate(V) to make it thermally decompose?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the thermal decomposition of calcium chlorate(V).
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/M/J/18

404/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(c) Chloric(V) acid, HCl O3, is a strong acid. It can be made from calcium chlorate(V).
(i) What colour is methyl orange indicator in chloric(V) acid?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Define the term acid in terms of proton transfer.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Complete the chemical equation to show HCl O3 behaving as an acid in water.
HCl O3 + H2O ....................... + .......................

[1]
[Total: 13]

405/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/M/J/18

406/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/M/J/18

407/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
408/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/M/J/18
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
am rid e nternational eneral ertificate of econdar ducation
*4984158881*
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
1 hour 15 minutes
Do not use staples, paper clips, lue or correction fluid

he s lla us is appro ed for use in n land, Wales and orthern reland as a am rid e nternational e el e el ertificate
IB18 11_0620_41/3RP
409/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The following formulae represent different substances.
Al Ag CaCO3 CH4 Cl 2 Cu SO2
Answer the following questions using only these substances.

(a) used to make food containers ............................................................................................. [1]
(b) added to a blast furnace to remove impurities during the production of iron ....................... [1]
(c) the main constituent of natural gas ...................................................................................... [1]
(d) a cause of acid rain ............................................................................................................. [1]
(e) a gas which bleaches damp litmus paper ............................................................................ [1]
(f) a gas which contributes to climate change. ......................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/O/N/18

410/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 The table gives some information about four different particles, A, B, C and D.
number of number of number of electronic charge

particle
electrons neutrons protons structure on particle
A 11 12 11 2,8,1 0
B 14 11 2,8,1 0
C 18 20 2,8,8 0
D 18 20 17
(a) omplete the ta le he first row has een done for ou
(b) Give two particles from the table which are isotopes of each other.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Element Z is in the same group of the Periodic Table as A and is less reactive than A.
State the identity of element Z.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) C is unreactive.
Use information from the table to explain why.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

411/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 (a) Copper(II) nitrate decomposes when heated. Two gases, oxygen and nitrogen dioxide, and a
solid are made in the reaction.
A sample of copper(II) nitrate was decomposed using the apparatus shown.
copper(II) nitrate
water
heat
aqueous
sodium hydroxide
(i) Complete the chemical equation for the reaction.
2Cu(NO3)2 O2 + ......NO2 + ...................... [2]
(ii) Only oxygen gas is collected at X.
Explain why.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Nitrogen dioxide and other oxides of nitrogen are formed in car engines.
Explain how nitrogen dioxide is formed in car engines.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/O/N/18

412/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(c) A teacher heated 18.8 g of copper(II) nitrate.
(i) Calculate the number of moles of copper(II) nitrate present in the 18.8 g.
.............................. mol [2]
(ii) Calculate the maximum number of moles of oxygen that can be made by heating 18.8 g of
copper(II) nitrate.
.............................. mol [1]
(iii) Calculate the maximum volume of oxygen at room temperature and pressure, in cm3, that
can be made by heating 18.8 g of copper(II) nitrate.
.............................. cm3 [1]
(d) A sample of copper(II) nitrate was dissolved in water to form an aqueous solution.
The aqueous solution was split into three portions. A separate test was done on each portion
as shown.
test reagent added result

aqueous
1 light blue precipitate forms
sodium hydroxide
solution changes from blue to colourless
2 zinc powder
and a brown solid forms
3 ammonia gas is produced
(i) Give the formula of the light blue precipitate formed in test 1.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain the changes seen in test 2.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Identify the two reagents that must be added to the aqueous copper(II) nitrate in test 3.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]

413/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(e) Copper(II) nitrate can be made by reacting copper(II) carbonate with nitric acid. One of the
products is carbon dioxide.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the reaction of copper(II) carbonate with nitric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Carbon dioxide is added to the air by living things.
Name the chemical process by which living things add carbon dioxide to the air.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Carbon dioxide is removed from the air by plants.
Name the chemical process by which plants remove carbon dioxide from the air.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/O/N/18

414/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 (a) Sulfuric acid is made industrially by a four-step process.
step 1 Sulfur is burned in air to produce sulfur dioxide.

step 2 Sulfur dioxide is converted into sulfur trioxide.
step 3 Sulfur trioxide is reacted with concentrated sulfuric acid to produce oleum.
step 4 Oleum is reacted with water to produce concentrated sulfuric acid.
(i) Some sulfur is obtained by mining.
Name one other major source of sulfur.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the name of the process by which sulfuric acid is made industrially?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe the conversion of sulfur dioxide into sulfur trioxide in step 2.
In your answer, include:

a chemical e uation for the reaction
the essential reaction conditions
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) When concentrated sulfuric acid is added to glucose, C6H12O6, a black solid is produced. The
concentrated sulfuric acid acts as a dehydrating agent.
(i) What is removed from the glucose in this reaction?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the black solid produced in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

415/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(c) he as h dro en sulfide, 2 S, is produced when concentrated sulfuric acid is added to solid
potassium iodide.
The reaction involves oxidation.
(i) Define the term oxidation in terms of electron transfer.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
h dro en sulfide how outer shell electrons onl
H S H
[2]
(iii) dro en sulfide has a simple molecular structure
plain wh h dro en sulfide has a low oilin point
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/O/N/18

416/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(d) Dilute sulfuric acid reacts with aqueous sodium hydrogencarbonate in a neutralisation reaction.
H2SO4(aq) + 2NaHCO3(aq) Na2SO4(aq) + 2H2O(l) + 2CO2(g)
In a titration, 0.200 mol / dm3 aqueous sodium hydrogencarbonate was used to neutralise
20.0 cm3 of dilute sulfuric acid of concentration 0.150 mol / dm3.
(i) Calculate the number of moles of dilute sulfuric acid used in the titration.
.............................. mol [1]
(ii) Calculate the number of moles of sodium hydrogencarbonate needed to neutralise the
dilute sulfuric acid.
.............................. mol [1]
(iii) Calculate the volume, in cm3, of 0.200 mol / dm3 aqueous sodium hydrogencarbonate
needed to neutralise the dilute sulfuric acid.
.............................. cm3 [1]
[Total: 17]

417/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
5 Hydrogen gas reacts with iodine gas. The equation is shown.
H2(g) + I2(g) 2HI(g)
The reaction is reversible and can reach equilibrium.
(a) What is meant by the term equilibrium?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The graphs show how pressure affects the yield of hydrogen iodide, HI, at two different
temperatures.
500 °C
yield of
hydrogen iodide
700 °C
pressure
(i) Explain why the yield at 500 °C does not change as the pressure is increased.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What can you conclude from the difference in the yield of hydrogen iodide at the two
temperatures shown? Explain your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/O/N/18

418/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(c) The graph shows how the concentration of hydrogen iodide, HI, changes after hydrogen gas
and iodine gas are mixed together in a sealed container.
concentration of
hydrogen iodide
time
(i) When is the rate of reaction fastest?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The reaction was repeated at the same temperature and pressure but in the presence of
a catalyst.
Draw a graph on the same axes to show how the concentration of hydrogen iodide changes
with time in the presence of a catalyst. [2]
(d) A mixture of hydrogen gas and iodine gas is allowed to reach equilibrium.
(i) Increasing the pressure of a gas increases its concentration.
State and explain the effect of increasing the pressure on the rate of the forward reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State and explain the effect of increasing the temperature on the rate of the reverse
reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 13]

419/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 (a) Ethane, C2H6, is a member of the homologous series called alkanes.

Ethanol, C2H5OH, is a member of the homologous series called alcohols.
(i) Alkanes are hydrocarbons.
What is meant by the term hydrocarbon?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) All members of a homologous series can be represented by a general formula.
State the general formula of:
al anes ........................................................................................................................
alcohols ........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State two characteristics, other than having the same general formula, of members of a
homologous series.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Ethane can react with chlorine in a substitution reaction.
(i) State one essential reaction condition.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of the organic product formed by substitution of one of the hydrogen
atoms in ethane with chlorine. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[1]
(iii) Name the product of the substitution reaction between ethane and chlorine that does not
contain carbon.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/O/N/18

420/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(c) Propan-1-ol is an alcohol.
The structure of propan-1-ol is shown.
H H H
H C C C O H
H H H
Propan-1-ol reacts with ethanoic acid to form an ester.
Give the name of the ester formed in this reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Ester Y has the structure shown.
H
H C H
H H O
H C C C O C H
H H H
ester Y
(i) Give the molecular formula of ester Y.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Draw the structures of the carboxylic acid and the alcohol used to make ester Y. Show all
of the atoms and all of the bonds. Give the name of the carboxylic acid and the alcohol.
structure of the carboxylic acid
name of the carboxylic acid ................................................................................................
structure of the alcohol
name of the alcohol ............................................................................................................

[4]

421/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
(e) Nylon is a polyamide.
Complete the diagram to show the structure of nylon. Show all of the atoms and all of the
bonds present in the linkages.
[3]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/O/N/18

422/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0620/41/O/N/18

423/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
424/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/O/N/18
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*44 1
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes
1

9*

IB18 11_0620_42/3RP
425/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Element X can undergo the following physical changes.
gaseous X
boiling or
evaporation
2
liquid X 4
3
1
solid X
(a) (i) i e the scientific name for each of the num ered ph sical chan es
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
3 ..........................................................................................................................................
4 ..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(ii) Explain why the changes shown are physical changes.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) ne difference etween oilin and e aporation is the rate at which the processes occur
State one other difference etween oilin and e aporation
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Descri e the separation, arran ement and motion of particles of element X in the solid state.
separation ..................................................................................................................................
arrangement ..............................................................................................................................
motion ........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Element X is a roup metal t urns in air to form an o ide X2O.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18

426/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 a nesium, calcium and strontium are roup elements
(a) omplete the ta le to show the arran ement of electrons in a calcium atom
shell num er 1 2 3 4
num er of electrons
[1]
(b) Descri e how the arran ement of electrons in a strontium atom is
(i) similar to the arrangement of electrons in a calcium atom
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
(ii) different from the arrangement of electrons in a calcium atom.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Calcium reacts with cold water to form two products:
a colourless as, P, which pops with a li hted splint

a wea l al aline solution, Q, which turns mil when car on dio ide is u led throu h it
(i) Name gas P.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) dentif the ion responsi le for ma in solution Q alkaline.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest the pH of solution Q.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Write a chemical equation for the reaction of calcium with cold water.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

427/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(d) a nesium reacts with chlorine to form ma nesium chloride, l 2. Magnesium chloride is
an ionic compound.
(i) Complete the diagrams to show the electronic structures of the ions in magnesium chloride.
...... ...... ......
Cl Mg Cl
[3]
(ii) Give three physical properties that are typical of ionic compounds such as MgCl 2.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
3 ..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(e) Aqueous magnesium chloride is added to aqueous silver nitrate. A white precipitate forms.
Write an ionic e uation for this reaction nclude state s m ols
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18

428/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 Sulfur is an important element.
(a) plain how urnin fossil fuels containin sulfur leads to the formation of acid rain
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) ulfuric acid is manufactured the ontact process ne step in the ontact process in ol es
a re ersi le reaction in which sulfur trio ide, 3, is formed
(i) Write a chemical e uation for this re ersi le reaction nclude the correct s m ol to show
that the reaction is re ersi le
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) tate the conditions and name the catal st used in this re ersi le reaction
temperature ........................................................................................................................
pressure ..............................................................................................................................
catalyst ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(iii) Descri e how the sulfur trio ide formed is con erted into sulfuric acid in the ne t steps of
the Contact process.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

429/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(c) Dilute sulfuric acid is used to make salts known as sulfates.
method consistin of three steps is used to ma e inc sulfate from inc car onate
step 1 dd an e cess of inc car onate to cm3 of mol dm3 dilute sulfuric acid until
the reaction is complete.
step 2 Filter the mixture.
step 3 eat the filtrate until a saturated solution forms and then allow it to cr stallise
(i) ame a suita le piece of apparatus for measurin cm3 of dilute sulfuric acid in step 1.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two o ser ations which would show that the reaction is complete in step 1.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Wh is it important to add an e cess of inc car onate in step 1?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) What is meant the term saturated solution in step 3?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(v) The equation for the reaction is shown.
ZnCO3(s) + H2SO4(aq) ZnSO4(......) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)
omplete the e uation insertin the state s m ol for inc sulfate
(vi) ame another inc compound which could e used to ma e inc sulfate from dilute
sulfuric acid using this method.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vii) Suggest why this method would not wor to ma e arium sulfate from arium car onate
and dilute sulfuric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18

430/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(d) n a titration, a student added cm3 of mol dm3 aqueous sodium hydroxide to a
conical flas he student then added a few drops of meth l oran e to the solution in the
conical flas
Dilute sulfuric acid was then added from a urette to the conical flas he olume of dilute
sulfuric acid needed to neutralise the a ueous sodium h dro ide was cm3.
2NaOH + H2SO4 Na2SO4 + 2H2O
(i) What was the colour of the methyl orange in the aqueous sodium hydroxide?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Determine the concentration of the dilute sulfuric acid in dm3.
alculate the num er of moles of a ueous sodium h dro ide added to the conical
flas
.............................. mol
alculate the num er of moles of dilute sulfuric acid added from the urette
.............................. mol
alculate the concentration of the dilute sulfuric acid in mol dm3.
mol dm3
alculate the concentration of the dilute sulfuric acid in dm3.
dm3
[4]

431/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(e) Iron(II) sulfate decomposes when heated strongly.
2FeSO4(s) Fe2O3(s) + SO2(g) + SO3(g)
of e 4 s was heated and formed of e2O3(s).
[Mr, e 4 Mr, e2O3
Calculate the percentage yield for this reaction.
.............................. % [3]
[Total: 26]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18

432/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
4 student in esti ated the pro ress of the reaction etween dilute h drochloric acid, l, and an
e cess of lar e pieces of mar le, a 3, usin the apparatus shown
gas syringe
dilute
hydrochloric acid an excess of large
pieces of marble
(a) A graph of the volume of gas produced against time is shown.
150
100
volume of gas
produced / cm3
50
0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
time / s
(i) How does the shape of the graph show that the rate of reaction decreased as the reaction
progressed?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Why did the rate of reaction decrease as the reaction progressed?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) fter how man seconds did the reaction finish
.............................. s [1]
(b) he e periment was repeated usin the same mass of smaller pieces of mar le ll other
conditions were kept the same.
Draw a graph on the grid to show the progress of the reaction using the smaller pieces of
mar le

433/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(c) The original experiment was repeated at a higher temperature. All other conditions were kept
the same.
Descri e and e plain, in terms of collisions etween particles, the effect of usin a hi her
temperature on the time ta en for the reaction to finish
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................
otal
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18

434/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
5 l nes are a homolo ous series of unsaturated h drocar ons

ll mem ers contain a triple ond
(a) omplete the ta le showin information a out the first three alkynes.
formula C 2H 2 C 3H 4
structure 3 2 –CH3
name ethyne ut ne
[2]
(b) omplete the dot and cross dia ram to show the electron arran ement in a molecule of eth ne,
how outer shell electrons onl
H C C H
[2]
(c) Compounds in the same homologous series have the same general formula.
(i) Give two other characteristics of mem ers of a homolo ous series
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) se the information in the ta le in (a) to deduce the general formula of alkynes.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Alkynes are unsaturated.
Descri e a test for unsaturation
test .............................................................................................................................................
result ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]

435/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
(e) (i) ame an o idisin a ent which can e used to o idise ethanol to ethanoic acid
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Draw the structure of ethanoic acid how all of the atoms and all of the onds
[1]
(f) ar o lic acids can e con erted into esters
(i) he ester formed reactin propanoic acid and methanol has the molecular formula
C4H8O2.
ame this ester and draw its structure how all of the atoms and all of the onds
name of the ester ................................................................................................................
structure of the ester
[2]
(ii) Name another ester with the molecular formula C4H8O2.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(g) Polyesters are polymers.
(i) What type of polymerisation is used in the manufacture of polyesters?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name a polyester.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 17]
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18

436/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18

437/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18

438/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0620/42/O/N/18

439/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
440/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/O/N/18
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*4 84
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
1 hour 15 minutes
5988*

IB18 11_0620_43/3RP
441/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Answer the following questions using only the substances in the list.
ammonia bauxite carbon dioxide carbon monoxide
hematite oxygen sodium chloride sulfur dioxide
(a) an element ........................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) an ore of iron ....................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) used to bleach wood pulp .................................................................................................... [1]
(d) used to manufacture fertilisers ............................................................................................ [1]
(e) a toxic gas produced during the incomplete combustion of hydrocarbons
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) an ionic compound .............................................................................................................. [1]
(g) a reactant in photosynthesis ................................................................................................ [1]
(h) a product of photosynthesis. ................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/O/N/18

442/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(a) (i) What is meant by the term electrolysis?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name the type of particle responsible for the conduction of electricity during electrolysis in:
the metal wires ...................................................................................................................
the electrolyte .....................................................................................................................

[2]
(b) The table gives information about the products of the electrolysis of two electrolytes. Platinum
electrodes are used in each case.
(i) Give two reasons why platinum is suitable to use as an electrode.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Complete the table.
observation name of product observation name of product

electrolyte
at the anode (+) at the anode (+) at the cathode (–) at the cathode (–)
concentrated aqueous bubbles of

potassium chloride colourless gas
aqueous bubbles of
copper(II) sulfate colourless gas
[6]
[Total: 12]

443/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 Tin is a metallic element in Group IV. Its main ore is cassiterite which is an impure form of
tin(IV) oxide, SnO2.
Tin also occurs in stannite, Cu2FeSnS4.
(a) Calculate the relative formula mass, Mr, of Cu2FeSnS4.
Mr of Cu2FeSnS4 = .............................. [1]
(b) The Mr of SnO2 is 151.
Calculate the percentage of tin by mass in SnO2.
percentage of tin by mass in SnO2 = .............................. [1]
(c) The percentage of tin by mass in Cu2FeSnS4 is 27.6%.
Use this information and your answer to (b) to suggest whether it would be better to extract tin
from SnO2 or Cu2FeSnS4.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Tin can be extracted by heating tin(IV) oxide with carbon. Carbon monoxide is the other product.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) The position of tin in the reactivity series is shown.
iron most reactive

tin
copper least reactive
A student added iron to a solution containing Sn2+ ions.
The student then separately added tin to a solution containing Cu2+ ions.
Complete the ionic equations. If there is no reaction write ‘no reaction’.
Fe + Sn2+ ...........................................................................................................................
Sn + Cu2+ ...........................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/O/N/18

444/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(f) Copper(II) nitrate, Cu(NO3)2, decomposes when it is heated. The only solid product is
copper(II) oxide, CuO. There are two gaseous products. One of the gaseous products is
oxygen.
(i) Describe a test for oxygen.
test ......................................................................................................................................
result ...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Name the other gaseous product. Describe its appearance.
name ...................................................................................................................................
appearance .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Write a chemical equation for the thermal decomposition of copper(II) nitrate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(g) Iron does not rust when it is completely coated with zinc. When the zinc is scratched, the iron
still does not rust.
(i) Explain why the iron does not rust when it is completely coated with zinc.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the iron still does not rust when the zinc is scratched.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 16]

445/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 (a) Dilute sulfuric acid and aqueous potassium hydroxide can be used to make potassium sulfate
crystals using a method that includes titration.
dilute
sulfuric acid
conical flask
25.0 cm3 of aqueous

potassium hydroxide
A student titrated 25.0 cm3 of 0.0500 mol / dm3 aqueous potassium hydroxide with dilute
sulfuric acid in the presence of an indicator. The volume of dilute sulfuric acid needed to
neutralise the aqueous potassium hydroxide was 20.0 cm3.
H2SO4 + 2KOH K2SO4 + 2H2O
Determine the concentration of the dilute sulfuric acid.
alculate the num er of moles of a ueous potassium h dro ide used
.............................. mol
alculate the num er of moles of dilute sulfuric acid needed to neutralise the aqueous
potassium hydroxide.
.............................. mol
alculate the concentration of the dilute sulfuric acid
.............................. mol / dm3

[3]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/O/N/18

446/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(b) fter the titration has een completed, the conical flas contains an a ueous solution of
potassium sulfate and some of the dissolved indicator.
Describe how to prepare a pure, dry sample of potassium sulfate crystals from new solutions
of dilute sulfuric acid and aqueous potassium hydroxide of the same concentrations as used in
the titration. Include a series of key steps in your answer.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(c) Potassium hydrogensulfate, KHSO4, is an acid salt. It dissolves in water to produce an aqueous
solution, X, containing K+, H+ and SO42– ions.
Describe what you would see when the following experiments are done.
(i) Magnesium ribbon is added to an excess of solution X.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) flame test is done on solution X.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) An aqueous solution containing barium ions is added to solution X.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Dilute sulfuric acid reacts with bases, metals and carbonates.
Write chemical equations for the reaction of dilute sulfuric acid with each of the following:
(i) magnesium hydroxide
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) zinc
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) sodium carbonate
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 18]

447/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 A student investigates the rate of reaction between lumps of calcium carbonate and dilute
hydrochloric acid using the apparatus shown.
CaCO3(s) + 2HCl (aq) CaCl 2(aq) + CO2(g) + H2O(l)
The calcium carbonate was in excess.
gas syringe
lumps of calcium carbonate dilute hydrochloric acid
(a) Which measurements should the student make during the reaction to determine the rate of
reaction?
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) What happens to the rate of reaction as the reaction proceeds? Explain your answer.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The student repeated the experiment at a higher temperature. All other conditions were kept
the same. The student found that the rate of reaction increased.
Explain, in terms of collisions, why the rate of reaction increased.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(d) Apart from using a higher temperature, suggest two other methods of increasing the rate of
this reaction.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/O/N/18

448/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
6 (a) Ethanol can be manufactured by fermentation and by hydration.
(i) Describe these two processes of ethanol manufacture.
In each case you should:

identif the reactants
i e the reaction conditions
write a chemical e uation for the reaction which produces ethanol
fermentation ........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
hydration .............................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[6]
(ii) Give two advantages of ethanol manufacture by fermentation compared to by hydration.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State two major uses of ethanol.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]

449/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(b) The structures of some polymers are shown.
A O O O O
O O O
B C O C O C O
O O O O
C O C C O O C C O
H O H O
D N C N C N C
H O
E CH CH2 CH CH2 CH CH2
CH3 CH3 CH3
Answer the following questions about these polymers.

Each polymer may be used once, more than once or not at all.
State which polymer, A, B, C, D or E, represents:
(i) an addition polymer ...................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) a protein ........................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) a polyester made from only one monomer ................................................................... [1]
(iv) Terylene ......................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) a complex carbohydrate. .............................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/O/N/18

450/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0620/43/O/N/18

451/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2018
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
452/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/O/N/18
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes
4 19*

IB17 03_0620_42/3RP
453/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 (a) Five organic compounds have the following structures.
A B C
H H H H H H H H H H H H
H C C C C H H C C C C H C C C C H
H H H H H H H H H
D E
H H H H H
Br C C Br Br C C C Br
H H H H H
(i) Which compound is butane?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Which two compounds are structural isomers of each other?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Which compound can be made by reacting an alkene with bromine?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Which compound is a saturated hydrocarbon?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Which compound has the empirical formula C2H5?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) Name the two products made during the complete combustion of compound C.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17

454/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(b) Petroleum can be separated into useful substances using the apparatus shown.
refinery gas
gasoline fraction
naphtha fraction
diesel oil fraction
Y fuel oil fraction
petroleum
lubricating fraction
and bitumen
(i) Name the fraction which is the most viscous.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the fraction with the smallest molecules.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the fraction which has the weakest attractive forces between molecules.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Fraction X is used as jet fuel.
Name fraction X.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) What happens at point Y on the diagram?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

455/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
2 Silver dichromate, Ag2Cr2O7, is a red insoluble salt.
Silver dichromate can be made by reacting silver nitrate solution with ammonium dichromate
solution. The chemical equation for the reaction is shown.
2AgNO3(aq) + (NH4)2Cr2O7(aq) 2NH4NO3(aq) + Ag2Cr2O7(s)
(a) Describe how you could obtain pure dry solid silver dichromate after mixing silver nitrate
solution and ammonium dichromate solution.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) (i) The charge on a silver ion is +1.
Deduce the charge on the dichromate ion in Ag2Cr2O7.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the ionic equation for the formation of silver dichromate in this reaction.
State symbols are not required.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Dilute aqueous sodium hydroxide was added to the ammonium nitrate solution made in the
reaction. The mixture was then warmed and damp Universal Indicator paper was held above
the mixture.
State and explain what would happen to the Universal Indicator paper.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17

456/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(d) The apparatus shown was set up.
plastic trough
S
solid silver nitrate solid
ammonium dichromate
water
fter fi e minutes, a red solid appeared alon the line mar ed S on the diagram.
(i) Explain why a red solid appeared along the line marked S.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The experiment was repeated at a higher temperature.
What effect, if any, would this have on the time taken for the red solid to appear? Explain
your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Ammonium dichromate, (NH4)2Cr2O7, undergoes thermal decomposition.

The products are chromium(III) oxide, nitrogen and water.
(i) What is meant by thermal decomposition?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the thermal decomposition of ammonium dichromate.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 16]

457/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
3 Nitryl chloride, NO2Cl, reacts with nitric oxide, NO. The forward reaction is exothermic.
NO2Cl (g) + NO(g) NO2(g) + NOCl (g)
The reaction can reach equilibrium.
(a) What is meant by the term equilibrium for a reversible reaction?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Explain why increasing the temperature increases the rate of reaction.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) State and explain the effect, if any, of increasing the temperature on the position of equilibrium.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State and explain the effect, if any, of decreasing the pressure on the position of equilibrium.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17

458/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(e) Nitrosyl chloride, NOCl, is a gas at room temperature. It has the structure shown.
O N Cl
(i) Complete the dot-and-cross diagram to show the arrangement of the outer shell electrons
in nitrosyl chloride.
O N Cl
[2]
(ii) Nitrosyl chloride has a boiling point of –6 °C.
Explain why nitrosyl chloride has a low boiling point.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 13]

459/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
4 Copper(II) sulfate solution was electrolysed using the apparatus shown.
– +
carbon cathode carbon anode
copper(II) sulfate
solution
(a) (i) Draw an arrow on the diagram to show the direction of movement of electrons in the wire.
Label the arrow A. [1]
(ii) Draw an arrow on the diagram to show the direction of movement of positive ions in the
copper(II) sulfate solution.
Label the arrow B. [1]
(b) Oxygen was formed at the anode and copper was formed at the cathode.
(i) The ionic half-equation for the formation of oxygen is shown.
4OH– O2 + 2H2O + 4e–
Explain why this reaction is oxidation.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the ionic half-equation for the formation of copper at the cathode.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The electrolysis was repeated using copper electrodes in place of carbon electrodes.
State and explain what happens to the masses of the anode and the cathode during this
electrolysis.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17

460/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 Iron is extracted from its ore using a blast furnace.
(a) In the blast furnace, coke burns in oxygen to produce heat energy and carbon dioxide.
How is this carbon dioxide converted into carbon monoxide in the blast furnace?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Calcium carbonate added to the blast furnace decomposes to form calcium oxide.
Calcium oxide removes silicon(IV) oxide impurities from the iron in a neutralisation reaction.
Write a chemical equation for the reaction of calcium oxide with silicon(IV) oxide. Suggest why
it is a neutralisation reaction.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The main impurity in iron obtained from the blast furnace is carbon.
(i) Why must the high levels of carbon be lowered before the iron becomes a useful material?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) How is the carbon removed from the iron?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) inc is e tracted from its ore he ore contains inc sulfide he inc sulfide is roasted in air to
produce zinc oxide and sulfur dioxide.
Zinc is then obtained from the zinc oxide using a blast furnace.
(i) i e the name of the ore of inc that contains inc sulfide
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical e uation for the reaction that ta es place when inc sulfide is roasted in
air.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest why the sulfur dioxide should not be released into the atmosphere.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

461/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(iv) The temperature inside the blast furnace in which zinc is extracted is about 1000 °C.
The table gives some information about substances in the blast furnace in which zinc is
extracted.
substance melting point / °C boiling point / °C

carbon sublimes at 4330 °C
silicon(IV) oxide 1610 2230
zinc 420 907
Use the data in the table to explain why the zinc obtained does not contain high levels of
impurities such as silicon(IV) oxide and carbon.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17

462/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
6 Barium carbonate decomposes when heated.
BaCO3(s) BaO(s) + CO2(g)
(a) A student heated a 10.0 g sample of barium carbonate until it was fully decomposed.
(i) Calculate the number of moles of barium carbonate the student used.
moles of barium carbonate = ............................. mol [2]
(ii) Calculate the volume of carbon dioxide gas produced at room temperature and pressure.
Give your answer in dm3.
volume of carbon dioxide = ............................. dm3 [1]
(b) The student added 2.00 g of the barium oxide produced to water.
BaO + H2O Ba(OH)2
Calculate the mass of barium hydroxide that can be made from 2.00 g of barium oxide. The Mr
of Ba(OH)2 is 171.
mass of barium hydroxide = ............................. g [1]
(c) A 1.50 g sample of barium hydroxide was dissolved in water. The total volume of the solution
was 100 cm3.
A 25.0 cm3 portion of the barium hydroxide solution was titrated against hydrochloric acid. The
volume of hydrochloric acid required was 18.75 cm3.
Ba(OH)2 + 2HCl BaCl 2 + 2H2O
(i) Calculate how many moles of barium hydroxide were in the 25.0 cm3 portion used in the
titration.
moles of barium hydroxide = ............................. mol [1]
(ii) Calculate the concentration of the hydrochloric acid used.
concentration of hydrochloric acid = ............................. mol / dm3 [2]
[Total: 7]

463/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
7 (a) The diagram shows part of the structure of an addition polymer.
H Cl H Cl H Cl
C C C C C C
H H H H H H
(i) Draw a circle around one repeat unit of the polymer. [1]
(ii) Draw the structure of the monomer from which this addition polymer is made.
[1]
(iii) Aqueous bromine is added to both the polymer and the monomer.
Describe what would be seen in each case.
with the polymer .................................................................................................................
with the monomer ...............................................................................................................

[2]
(b) The diagram shows part of the structure of a condensation polymer.
O O O O
C C N N C C N N
H H H H
(i) What type of condensation polymer is this?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On the diagram, draw a circle around one repeat unit of the polymer. [1]
(iii) Draw the structures of the two monomers from which the condensation polymer is made.
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17

464/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(c) Hydrolysis of a polymer gave a compound with the following composition by mass: C, 34.61%;
H, 3.85%; O, 61.54%.
(i) Calculate the empirical formula of the compound.
empirical formula = ............................ [3]
(ii) What additional information is needed to calculate the molecular formula of the compound?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]

465/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17

466/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/F/M/17

467/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
468/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/F/M/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
* 84 148954*
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
1 hour 15 minutes

IB17 06_0620_41/4RP
469/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 This question is about subatomic particles.
(a) Define the terms
proton number, ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
nucleon number. ........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Why is the 11H hydrogen atom the only atom to have an identical proton number and nucleon
number?
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Complete the table to show the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in the atoms and
ions given.

19
F 9
26
Mg 12
31
P3–
87
Sr2+
[6]
(d) (i) Write the formula of the compound formed from fluorine and ma nesium
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the formula of the compound formed from Sr2+ and P3–.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/M/J/17

470/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Some oxides of some elements are listed.
CO CO2 Na2O MgO Al 2O3
SiO2 P4O10 SO2 Cl 2O7 Cr2O3
(a) Answer the following questions using only oxides from the list. Each oxide may be used once,
more than once or not at all.
Give the formula of an oxide
(i) which is the main cause of acid rain, ..................................................................................
(ii) which would give a solution of pH 14 when added to water, ...............................................
(iii) which is coloured, ...............................................................................................................
(iv) which is the major impurity in iron ore, ................................................................................
(v) which is amphoteric, ............................................................................................................
(vi) which is neutral. ..................................................................................................................

[6]
(b) Amphoteric oxides and neutral oxides are different from each other.
(i) What is meant by the term amphoteric oxide?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is meant by the term neutral oxide?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

471/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 Magnesium sulfate and lead(II) sulfate are examples of salts.
(a) A student prepared magnesium sulfate crystals starting from magnesium carbonate. The
student carried out the experiment in four steps.
step 1 The student added excess magnesium carbonate to a small volume of

dilute sulfuric acid until no more magnesium carbonate would react.
step 2 he student filtered the mi ture
step 3 he student heated the filtrate o tained from step 2 until it was saturated.
step 4 he student allowed the hot filtrate to cool to room temperature and then remo ed
the crystals which formed.
(i) ow did the student now when the reaction had finished in step 1?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the residue in step 2.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) A saturated solution forms in step 3.
What is a saturated solution?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Explain why magnesium sulfate crystals form during step 4.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/M/J/17

472/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(b) Magnesium sulfate crystals are hydrated. Another student heated some hydrated
magnesium sulfate crystals in a crucible and obtained the following results.
mass of hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals = 4.92 g
mass of water removed = 2.52 g
(i) Calculate the number of moles of water removed.
moles of water = ............................. mol [1]
(ii) Calculate the number of moles of anhydrous magnesium sulfate remaining in the crucible.
The Mr of anhydrous magnesium sulfate is 120.
moles of anhydrous magnesium sulfate = ............................. mol [1]
(iii) Calculate the ratio of moles of anhydrous magnesium sulfate : moles of water. Give your
answer as whole numbers.
ratio = ................ : ................ [1]
(iv) Suggest the formula of hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals.
formula of hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals = ............................................ [2]

473/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(c) Lead(II) sulfate, PbSO4, is insoluble.
Describe how you would prepare a pure dry sample of lead(II) sulfate crystals starting from
solutions of lead(II) nitrate and sodium sulfate.
Include a series of key steps in your answer.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(d) Write the ionic equation for the reaction which takes place between solutions of lead(II) nitrate
and sodium sulfate.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/M/J/17

474/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 Zinc is a very important metal.
(a) inc is e tracted from its ore, inc lende inc lende contains inc sulfide, n
inc sulfide is con erted to inc o ide in an industrial process
(i) Descri e how inc sulfide is con erted to inc o ide in this industrial process
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write the chemical equation for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Zinc oxide is then reduced in a furnace.
(i) Name the substance added to the furnace to reduce the zinc oxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how the pure zinc is removed from the furnace and collected.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

475/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(c) When rods of zinc and copper are placed into dilute sulfuric acid as shown, electricity is
generated.
bulb
zinc rod copper rod
(i) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the zinc rod.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the copper rod.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The copper rod was replaced by an iron rod.
Suggest the change, if any, in the intensity of the light emitted from the bulb and give a
reason for your answer.
change ................................................................................................................................
reason .................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/M/J/17

476/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 When barium carbonate is added to dilute hydrochloric acid, carbon dioxide gas is formed.
A student carried out an experiment to measure the volume of gas formed as a reaction proceeds.
The student added a small mass of powdered barium carbonate to an excess of 0.1 mol / dm3
hydrochloric acid. A graph of the results was drawn.
The graph is shown.
400
300
volume
of gas 200
/ cm3
100
0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
time / s
(a) Name the two pieces of apparatus needed to take the measurements shown on the graph.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) On the axes below, sketch a graph to show how the rate of reaction changes as the reaction
proceeds.
Assume the initial rate of reaction is represented by the point at X.
rate of
reaction
0
0 30 60 90 120
time / s
[2]

477/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(c) The total volume of gas collected was 180 cm3 at room temperature and pressure.
Calculate the mass, in grams, of barium carbonate used.
BaCO3 + 2HCl BaCl 2 + H2O + CO2
mass of barium carbonate = ............................. g [3]
(d) The original graph has been drawn again.
On the grid, draw the graph expected if the same mass of barium carbonate is added as large
lumps instead of as a powder. All other conditions are the same as in the original experiment.
Explain why your graph is different from the original graph.
400
300
volume
of gas 200
/ cm3
100
0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
time / s
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/M/J/17

478/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(e) The original graph has been drawn again.
On the grid, draw the graph expected if the concentration of dilute hydrochloric acid is changed
from 0.1 mol / dm3 to 0.2 mol / dm3. All other conditions are the same as in the original experiment.
Explain, in terms of particles, why your graph is different from the original graph.
400
300
volume
of gas 200
/ cm3
100
0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
time / s
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(f) The experiment is changed and the mass of powdered barium carbonate is doubled. All other
conditions are the same as in the original experiment. The acid is still in excess.
Deduce the volume of gas formed at room temperature and pressure, in cm3, in this experiment.
volume of gas = .............................. cm3 [1]
[Total: 13]

479/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 The alkenes and alkanes are both examples of homologous series which are hydrocarbons.
(a) What is meant by the term hydrocarbon?
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Give three characteristics of an homologous series.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
3 .................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Name and draw the structure of the second member of the alkene homologous series.
name ..........................................................................................................................................
structure
[2]
(d) Alcohols can be made from alkenes.
Name the reagent and conditions needed to convert an alkene into an alcohol.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/M/J/17

480/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(e) The alcohol butanol, CH3CH2CH2CH2OH, can be converted into a carboxylic acid with four
carbon atoms.
(i) Name the carboxylic acid formed from butanol and draw its structure. Show all of the
name ...................................................................................................................................
structure
[2]
(ii) Ethanoic acid can be formed from ethanol by fermentation. It can also be formed by the
addition of a suitable chemical reagent.
Name the reagent needed to convert ethanol into ethanoic acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State the type of chemical change which occurs when ethanol is converted into
ethanoic acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Describe how a student could prepare the ester methyl ethanoate in a school laboratory.
In your description give
the names of the two starting organic chemicals,

the essential reaction conditions needed,
a chemical e uation for the reaction
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 19]

481/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/M/J/17

482/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/M/J/17

483/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
484/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*59 4154 9 *
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes

IB17 06_0620_42/5RP
485/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 (a) State the name of the process that is used to
(i) separate oxygen from liquid air,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) separate the individual dyes in ink,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) produce ethanol from simple sugars,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) obtain water from aqueous sodium chloride,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) separate the precipitate formed when aqueous silver nitrate is added to aqueous
sodium chloride.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State what is meant by the terms
(i) element,
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) compound,
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) ion.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17

486/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Carbon and silicon are elements in Group IV of the Periodic Table. Both carbon and silicon exist as
more than one isotope.
(a) Define the term isotopes.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Complete the following table which gives information about carbon atoms and silicon atoms.
carbon silicon
proton number
electronic structure
nucleon number 12 28
number of neutrons in one atom

[3]
(c) Silicon has a giant structure which is similar to the structure of diamond.
(i) Name the type of bond which is present between silicon atoms in silicon.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest two physical properties of silicon.

Use your knowledge of structure and bonding to explain why silicon has these physical
properties.
property 1 ...........................................................................................................................
reason 1 ..............................................................................................................................
property 2 ...........................................................................................................................
reason 2 ..............................................................................................................................
[4]
(d) Samples of air taken from industrial areas are found to contain small amounts of
carbon monoxide.
(i) Explain how this carbon monoxide is formed.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State why carbon monoxide should not be inhaled.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

487/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(e) Carbon dioxide, CO2, is a gas at room temperature and pressure, whereas silicon(IV) oxide,
SiO2, is a solid.
(i) Name the type of structure which the following compounds have.
carbon dioxide .............................................................................................................. [1]
silicon(IV) oxide ............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Use your knowledge of structure and bonding to explain why carbon dioxide is a gas at
room temperature and pressure, whereas silicon(IV) oxide is a solid.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(f) Silicon(IV) oxide is an acidic oxide. When silicon(IV) oxide reacts with alkalis, the salts formed
contain the ion SiO32–.
Write a chemical equation for the reaction between silicon(IV) oxide and aqueous
sodium hydroxide.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17

488/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 This question is about nitrogen and some of its compounds.
(a) Nitrogen in the air can be converted into ammonia by the Haber process. The chemical equation
for the reaction is shown.
N2 + 3H2 2NH3
(i) State the temperature and pressure used in the Haber process.
temperature ........................................................................................................................
pressure ..............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Name the catalyst used in the Haber process.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The ammonia produced in the Haber process can be oxidised to nitrogen(II) oxide at 900 °C.
(i) Balance the chemical equation for this reaction.
4NH3 + .....O2 .....NO + .....H2O

[2]
(ii) Suggest a reason, other than cost, why a temperature greater than 900 °C is not used.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Suggest a reason why a temperature less than 900 °C is not used.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Nitrogen(II) oxide can be reacted with oxygen and water to produce nitric acid as the only
product.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

489/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(d) Describe how you would prepare a pure dry sample of copper(II) nitrate crystals in the
laboratory using dilute nitric acid and solid copper(II) carbonate.
Include a series of key steps in your answer.
You should include a chemical equation for the reaction.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17

490/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7

491/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
4 Nickel, copper and zinc are three consecutive elements in the Periodic Table.
(a) Nickel and copper are transition elements.
State three chemical properties of transition elements.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Copper(II) oxide is a basic oxide but zinc oxide is an amphoteric oxide. Both oxides are
insoluble in water.
You are provided with a mixture of solid copper(II) oxide and solid zinc oxide. Describe how
you would obtain a sample of copper(II) oxide from this mixture.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Three cells are set up each using two metals.
cell 1 cell 2 cell 3
1.10 V 0.51 V ......... V

V V V
– + – +
zinc copper zinc nickel copper nickel
electrolyte electrolyte electrolyte
(i) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the zinc electrode in cell 1.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17

492/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(ii) Put the three metals, copper, nickel and zinc, in order of reactivity.
most reactive ........................................
........................................
least reactive ........................................

[1]
(iii) Complete the labelling in cell 3 by writing the polarity (+/–) of each electrode in the circles
and calculating the reading on the voltmeter. [2]
[Total: 11]

493/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
5 (a) The elements in Group VII are known as the halogens. Some halogens react with aqueous
solutions of halides.
(i) Complete the table by adding a  to indicate when a reaction occurs and a  to indicate
when no reaction occurs.
aqueous aqueous aqueous

potassium chloride potassium bromide potassium iodide
chlorine  
bromine 
iodine 
[3]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between chlorine and aqueous potassium bromide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A sample of vanadium chloride was weighed and dissolved in water. An excess of aqueous
sil er nitrate, acidified with dilute nitric acid, was added precipitate of sil er chloride was
formed. The ionic equation for this reaction is shown.
Ag+(aq) + Cl –(aq) AgCl (s)
The mass of silver chloride formed was 2.87 g.
(i) State the colour of the precipitate of silver chloride.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The relative formula mass of silver chloride, AgCl, is 143.5.
Calculate the number of moles in 2.87 g of AgCl.
moles of AgCl = .............................. mol [1]
(iii) Use your answer to (b)(ii) and the ionic equation to deduce the number of moles of chloride
ions, Cl –, that produced 2.87 g of AgCl.
moles of Cl – = .............................. mol [1]
(iv) The amount of vanadium chloride in the sample was 0.01 moles.
Use this and your answer to (b)(iii) to deduce the whole number ratio of moles of
vanadium chloride : moles of chloride ions.
Deduce the formula of vanadium chloride.
moles of vanadium chloride : moles of chloride ions ................... : ...................
formula of vanadium chloride .............................................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17

494/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(c) Astatine is at the bottom of Group VII. Use your knowledge of the properties of the halogens to
(i) predict the physical state of astatine at room temperature and pressure,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) write a chemical equation for the reaction between sodium and astatine.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Iodine reacts with chlorine. The chemical equation is shown.
I2 + Cl 2 2ICl
Use the bond energies to answer the questions.

I–I 151
Cl –Cl 242
I–Cl 208
(i) Calculate the total amount of energy required to break the bonds in 1 mole of I2 and
1 mole of Cl 2.
............................ kJ [1]
(ii) Calculate the total amount of energy given out when the bonds in 2 moles of ICl are
formed.
............................ kJ [1]
(iii) Use your answers to (d)(i) and (d)(ii) to calculate the overall energy change for the
reaction.
I2 + Cl 2 2ICl
............................ kJ / mol [1]
[Total: 15]

495/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 (a) An homologous series is a ‘family’ of organic compounds whose names have the same ending.
(i) Name the homologous series for which the names of the organic compounds end in -ene
and -oic acid.
-ene .............................................................................................................................. [1]
-oic acid ........................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State two characteristics of an homologous series.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Propan-1-ol is a member of the homologous series of alcohols. It reacts in the same way as
ethanol with acidified potassium man anate VII) and with carboxylic acids.
Name the type of compound that is formed when propan-1-ol is heated with
acidified potassium man anate VII), ........................................................................................
ethanoic acid and a suitable catalyst. ........................................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17

496/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(c) The structure of prop-2-enoic (acrylic) acid is shown.
H CO2H
C C
H H
(i) What would you see if prop-2-enoic acid were added to
aqueous bromine, ...............................................................................................................
a solution of sodium carbonate. ..........................................................................................

[2]
(ii) Prop-2-enoic acid can be polymerised to form poly(acrylic acid).
Suggest the type of polymerisation that occurs and draw one repeat unit of the polymer.
type of polymerisation .........................................................................................................
repeat unit
[3]
[Total: 11]

497/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17

498/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/M/J/17

499/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
500/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*5634281822*
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
1 hour 15 minutes

IB17 06_0620_43/4RP
501/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Six different atoms can be represented as follows.

3 3 12 13 14 19
1A 2D 6E 6G 7J 9L
(a) Answer the following questions using atoms from the list. Each atom may be used once, more
than once or not at all.
Select one atom from the six shown which
(i) has exactly seven protons,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) has exactly six neutrons,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) has more protons than neutrons,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) has the electronic structure [2,5],
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) is an atom of an element from Group VII of the Periodic Table,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) is an atom of a noble gas.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Two of the six atoms shown are isotopes of each other.
(i) What is meant by the term isotopes?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Which two of the six atoms shown are isotopes of each other?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Why do isotopes have identical chemical properties?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/M/J/17

502/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Cyclopropane is a colourless gas.

Cyclopropane reacts with bromine at room temperature. The chemical equation for the reaction is
shown.
H H
H H H
C
+ Br Br Br C C C Br
H C C H
H H H
H H
cyclopropane bromine dibromopropane
(a) (i) What is the empirical formula of cyclopropane?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What colour change, if any, would you see when cyclopropane is bubbled into aqueous
bromine?
initial colour .........................................................................................................................
final colour ..........................................................................................................................

[2]
(b) The reaction of cyclopropane with bromine is exothermic.
(i) Complete the energy level diagram for this reaction by
adding the product of the reaction,

labelling the energy change, H.
cyclopropane + bromine
energy
[2]

503/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(ii) Propene also reacts with bromine.
H
H Br Br H
H C
H + Br Br H C C C H
C C
H H H
H H
Use the bond energies in the table to calculate the energy change, ΔH, for the reaction.
C–H C–C Br–Br C–Br C=C

bond energy in kJ / mol 412 348 193 285 611
energy change = ............................ kJ / mol [3]
(c) The boiling point of bromine is 59 °C and the boiling point of iodine is 184 °C.
Explain why iodine has a higher boiling point than bromine.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/M/J/17

504/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 Magnesium is a metal.
(a) Describe the structure and bonding in magnesium.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Why can magnesium conduct electricity when solid?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Why is magnesium malleable?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

505/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(d) agnesium reacts ith sulfur to form the ionic compound magnesium sulfide, gS.
The diagrams show the electronic structures of atoms of magnesium and sulfur.
Mg S
(i) Complete the diagrams to sho the electronic structures of the ions in magnesium sulfide.
Mg S
[3]
(ii) Ionic compounds, such as magnesium sulfide, do not conduct electricity when solid.
agnesium sulfide does not dissolve in water.
agnesium sulfide does conduct electricity under certain conditions.
State the conditions needed for magnesium sulfide to conduct electricity. E plain hy
magnesium sulfide conducts electricity under these conditions.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/M/J/17

506/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 Gasoline is used as a fuel for cars. It is a mixture of hydrocarbons.
(a) Name the raw material from which gasoline is obtained.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) One of the compounds in gasoline is heptane, C7H16. Heptane is a saturated hydrocarbon.
(i) What is meant by the term saturated hydrocarbon?
saturated .............................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
hydrocarbon ........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) To which homologous series does heptane belong?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give two characteristics of an homologous series.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Complete the chemical equation for the complete combustion of heptane.
C7H16 + ..........O2 ....................... + .......................

[2]

507/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(c) Car engines produce carbon monoxide and oxides of nitrogen.
(i) Name an environmental problem that is caused by the release of oxides of nitrogen into
the air.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how carbon monoxide and oxides of nitrogen are formed in car engines.
carbon monoxide ................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
oxides of nitrogen ...............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(iii) State one adverse effect of carbon monoxide on human health.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Describe and explain how catalytic converters remove oxides of nitrogen from car engine
exhaust fumes. You are advised to include a chemical equation in your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/M/J/17

508/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(d) The formula C4H10 represents two structural isomers, A and B.
H C H
H H H H H H
H C C C C H H C C C H
H H H H H H H
A B
(i) Name isomer A.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is meant by the term structural isomers?
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Isomer B reacts with chlorine in a substitution reaction.
Give the conditions required for the reaction to occur and draw the structures of two
possible products, one of which is organic and one of which is not organic.
conditions ...........................................................................................................................
structures of products
[3]
[Total: 23]

509/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
5 The diagram shows a simple cell.
voltmeter
V
metal 1 metal 2
electrolyte
The simple cell was used with different metals as electrodes. The voltages were recorded in the
table.
If the voltage measured is positive then metal 2 is more reactive than metal 1.
If the voltage measured is negative then metal 1 is more reactive than metal 2.
metal 2
beryllium cobalt nickel silver vanadium
beryllium 0.0 V –1.6 V –1.6 V not measured –0.7 V
cobalt 0.0 V 0.0 V –1.1 V 0.9 V
metal 1
nickel 0.0 V –1.1 V 0.9 V

silver 0.0 V 2.0 V
vanadium 0.0 V
The more reactive metal is o idised.

The bigger the difference in reactivity of the metals, the larger the reading on the voltmeter.
(a) In a simple cell using nickel and silver, the nickel is oxidised.
(i) Define oxidation in terms of electrons.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Nickel forms ions with a charge of +2.
Write an ionic half-equation to show the oxidation of nickel.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What will happen to the mass of the nickel electrode when the nickel is oxidised?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/M/J/17

510/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(b) Use the data in the table to answer the following questions.
(i) Which of the metals in the table is the most reactive?

.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State which two different metals have the same reactivity.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Predict the voltage produced by a simple cell with beryllium as metal 1 and silver as
metal 2.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe how the simple cell in the diagram can be used to show that magnesium is more
reactive than beryllium. Explain your answer.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

511/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
6 Barium carbonate, BaCO3, is an insoluble solid.
(a) When barium carbonate is heated strongly, it undergoes thermal decomposition. One of the
products is barium oxide.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the thermal decomposition of barium carbonate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the pH of the solution formed when barium oxide is added to water.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Barium nitrate decomposes on heating in the same way as magnesium nitrate decomposes.
Name the two gaseous products formed when barium nitrate is heated.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Aqueous sodium carbonate is added to aqueous barium nitrate.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the reaction of aqueous sodium carbonate with aqueous
barium nitrate.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe how a pure sample of barium carbonate could be obtained from the resulting
mixture.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/M/J/17

512/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(c) Barium carbonate reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid.
BaCO3 + 2HCl BaCl 2 + CO2 + H2O
9.85 g of barium carbonate were added to 250 cm3 of 1.00 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid. This is
an excess of hydrochloric acid.
(i) Calculate how many moles of barium carbonate were used in this experiment.
moles of barium carbonate = ............................ mol [2]
(ii) Deduce how many moles of carbon dioxide were made when all the barium carbonate had
reacted.
moles of carbon dioxide = ............................ mol [1]
(iii) Calculate the volume of carbon dioxide formed in (c)(ii) at room temperature and pressure,
in dm3.
volume of carbon dioxide = ............................ dm3 [1]
(iv) Calculate how many moles of hydrochloric acid there were in excess.
excess moles of hydrochloric acid = ............................ mol [2]
[Total: 15]

513/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/M/J/17

514/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/M/J/17

515/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
516/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/M/J/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*1311 6658 *
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
1 hour 15 minutes

IB17 11_0620_41/4RP
517/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The table gives information about five particles. The particles are all atoms or ions.

particle
A 6 8 6
B 12 12 12
C 13 14 10
D 8 8 10
E 11 12 11
ns er the follo ing uestions using the information in the table.

Each particle may be used once, more than once or not at all.
(a) Which particle, A, B, C, D or E,
(i) is an atom ith atomic number 12,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) is an atom ith nucleon number 1 ,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) is an ion ith a positive charge,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) has only one electron in its outer shell
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) D is an ion of an element.
Identify the element and rite the formula of D.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/O/N/17

518/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 The graph sho s ho the temperature of a substance changes as it is cooled over a period of
minutes. The substance is a gas at the start.
300 S
250 T
V W
200
X
temperature Y
150
/ °C
Z
100
50
0
0 10 20 30
time / minutes
Each letter on the graph may be used once, more than once or not at all.
(a) Which letter, S, T, V, W, X, Y or Z, sho s hen
(i) the particles in the substance have the most inetic energy,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the particles in the substance are furthest apart,
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) the substance e ists as both a gas and a li uid
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) se the graph to estimate the free ing point of the substance.
.............................. °C [1]
(c) Name the change of state directly from a solid to a gas.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) When smo e is vie ed through a microscope, the smo e particles in the air appear to ump
around.
(i) What term describes this movement of the smo e particles
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) E plain hy the smo e particles move in this ay.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

519/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 (a) When magnesium is added to a ueous copper II sulfate a reaction occurs.

The ionic e uation for the reaction is sho n.
Mg + Cu2+ Mg2+ + Cu
(i) Give one change you ould observe during this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) E plain hy this is a redo reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Identify the o idising agent in this reaction. Give a reason for your ans er.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) redo reaction occurs hen magnesium is heated ith iron III o ide.
Write a chemical e uation for the reaction bet een magnesium and iron III o ide.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The metal iron and the alloy steel are commonly used materials. problem ith them is that
they rust.
(i) o does painting iron and steel prevent rusting
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) agnesium bloc s can be attached to the bottom of steel boats.
E plain ho the magnesium bloc s prevent the hole of the bottom of the boat from
rusting.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/O/N/17

520/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(iii) eplacing the magnesium bloc s ith copper bloc s does not prevent rusting.
E plain hy the copper bloc s do not prevent rusting.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

521/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 (a) Ethanol, C2H5 , can be made by fermentation.
(i) Complete the chemical e uation for the formation of ethanol by fermentation.
C6H12O6 ......C2H5 ..............................

[2]
(ii) State two conditions re uired for fermentation.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Ethanol can also be made by the catalytic hydration of ethene. The e uation for the reaction is
sho n.
C2H4 + H2O C2H5OH
(i) Name a suitable catalyst for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the ma imum mass of ethanol that can be made from g of ethene.
ma imum mass of ethanol ............................. g 2
(c) Ethanol can be o idised to form ethanoic acid.
(i) Name a suitable o idising agent for this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/O/N/17

522/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(ii) molecule of ethanoic acid has the structure sho n.
H O
H C C
H O H
Complete the dot and cross diagram to sho the electron arrangement in ethanoic acid.
Sho outer shell electrons only.
H O
H C C
H O H
[3]
(d) Ethanoic acid is a ea acid.
(i) When referring to an acid, hat is meant by the term weak
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe ho you could sho that ethanoic acid is a ea er acid than hydrochloric acid.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

523/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(e) Carbo ylic acids react ith alcohols to ma e esters.
The structure of an ester is sho n.
H H O
H C C C H H H H
H H O C C C C H
H H H H
Dra the structures of the carbo ylic acid and alcohol from hich this ester can be made.
Give the names of the carbo ylic acid and alcohol.
structure of the carbo ylic acid
name of the carbo ylic acid .......................................................................................................
structure of the alcohol
name of the alcohol ...................................................................................................................

[4]
[Total: 19]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/O/N/17

524/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 (a) Solid copper II carbonate undergoes thermal decomposition. ne of the products of the
thermal decomposition is copper II o ide.
(i) State the colour change of the solid seen during the reaction.
start colour ..........................................................................................................................
end colour ...........................................................................................................................

[1]
(ii) Write a chemical e uation for the thermal decomposition of copper II carbonate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Copper II carbonate reacts ith dilute nitric acid. ne of the products of the reaction is a
solution of copper II nitrate.
(i) Describe tests for copper II ions and nitrate ions. Include the results of the tests.
copper II) ions ....................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
nitrate ions ...........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[4]
(ii) Copper II nitrate undergoes thermal decomposition.
alance the chemical e uation for the thermal decomposition of copper II nitrate.
......Cu N )
3 2 ......Cu ......N 2 ...... 2
[1]

525/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(c) Nitrogen dio ide, N 2, e ists in e uilibrium ith dinitrogen tetro ide, N2O4.
Nitrogen dio ide is bro n and dinitrogen tetro ide is colourless.
2NO2 g N2O4 g
bro n colourless
(i) sample of nitrogen dio ide and dinitrogen tetro ide at e uilibrium as placed in a closed
gas syringe.
The syringe plunger as pushed in. This increased the pressure in the gas syringe. The
temperature as ept constant.
nitrogen dioxide and

dinitrogen tetroxide
at equilibrium
end blocked
gas syringe
State ho the colour of the gas in the syringe changed. E plain your ans er in terms of
the position of the e uilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) sealed tube containing nitrogen dio ide and dinitrogen tetro ide at e uilibrium as
cooled in an ice bath at constant pressure. The contents of the tube became paler.
Suggest an e planation for this observation in terms of the position of the e uilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/O/N/17

526/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
6 luminium is e tracted from aluminium o ide by electrolysis.
(a) Why is aluminium not e tracted by heating aluminium o ide ith carbon
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) luminium o ide is an ionic compound ith a high melting point.
(i) Complete the dot and cross diagram to sho the electron arrangement in one of the
o ide ions present in aluminium o ide. Include the charge on the o ide ion.
ne of the aluminium ions is sho n.
3+ ........
Al O
[2]
(ii) The melting point of aluminium o ide is above 2 °C.
E plain hy aluminium o ide has a high melting point.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

527/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
(c) luminium can be e tracted by electrolysis using the apparatus sho n.
+ power –
supply
anodes wires
cathode
+ +
aluminium oxide
and cryolite
molten aluminium
(i) Name the type of particle responsible for the transfer of charge in
the ires, ............................................................................................................................
the electrolyte. ....................................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) Give two reasons hy cryolite is used.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Write the ionic half e uation for the formation of aluminium during the electrolysis.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) E plain ho carbon dio ide gas is formed at the anodes.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) When a piece of aluminium is placed in dilute hydrochloric acid, there is no immediate visible
reaction.
If the aluminium is left in the dilute hydrochloric acid for several hours, bubbles start to form.
E plain hy aluminium does not react immediately ith dilute hydrochloric acid.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/O/N/17

528/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13

529/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
7 Copper II o ide reacts ith dilute hydrochloric acid.
Cu s 2 Cl a CuCl 2 a 2 l
. g of copper II o ide ere added to . cm3 of 1. mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid. This as an
e cess of copper II o ide.
(a) The rate of the reaction can be increased by increasing the concentration of the hydrochloric acid
or by heating it.
(i) In terms of collisions, e plain hy increasing the concentration of the hydrochloric acid
increases the rate of the reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) In terms of collisions, e plain hy heating the hydrochloric acid increases the rate of the
reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/O/N/17

530/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
(b) (i) Calculate the number of moles of copper II o ide added to the hydrochloric acid.
moles of copper II o ide ............................. mol 2
(ii) Calculate the number of moles of hydrochloric acid used.
moles of hydrochloric acid ............................. mol 1
(iii) Calculate the mass of copper II o ide that did not react.
mass of copper II o ide that did not react ............................. g 2
(c) Crystals of hydrated copper II chloride ere obtained from the solution at the end of the
reaction.
The crystals had the follo ing composition by mass Cl, 1. 2 Cu, . , 2.
,1 . 1 .
Calculate the empirical formula of the crystals.
empirical formula ............................. 2
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2017 0620/41/O/N/17

531/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
532/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/O/N/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
* 3
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
33 21 *
1 hour 15 minutes

IB17 11_0620_42/4RP
533/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 (a) Dust particles in the air move around in a random way.
(i) What term describes the random movement of the dust particles?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Identify the particles in the air which cause the random movement of the dust particles.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why the dust particles move in this way.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) When chlorine gas, Cl 2, is put into a gas ar, it spreads out to fill the gas ar.
When bromine gas, Br2, is put into a gas ar, it also spreads out to fill the gas ar.
The process takes longer for bromine gas than for chlorine gas.
gas jar
gas
start later
(i) What term describes the way that the gas particles spread out?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Use data from the eriodic Table to e plain hy bromine gas ta es longer to fill a gas ar
than chlorine gas.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why increasing the temperature increases the rate at which the gas particles
spread out.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17

534/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 (a) Complete the table to show the electronic structure of the atoms and ions.
electronic structure
F 2,7
Si
Ca2+
N3–
[3]
(b) Predict the formula of the compound formed between Ca2+ and N3–.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangements in the two ions present in
lithium chloride, LiCl.
Show outer shell electrons only. Include the charges on the ions.
[3]
(d) Sulfur dichloride, SCl 2, is a covalent compound. It has the structure Cl –S–Cl.
Draw a dot-and-cross diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of

sulfur dichloride.
[3]

535/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(e) In terms of attractive forces, explain why LiCl has a higher melting point than SCl 2.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(f) Suggest the identity of a covalent compound with a higher melting point than LiCl.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17

536/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 The chemical equation for the complete combustion of ethanol, C2H5OH, is shown.
C2H5OH + 3O2 2CO2 + 3H2O
The energy released when one mole of ethanol undergoes complete combustion is 1280 kJ.
Part of the energy level diagram for this reaction is shown.
X
C2H5OH + 3O2
energy
(a) Complete the energy level diagram to show

the products of the reaction,
the overall energy change of the reaction.
[3]
(b) What does X represent?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

537/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(c) The chemical equation for the complete combustion of methanol, CH3OH, is shown.
2CH3OH + 3O2 2CO2 + 4H2O
The equation can be represented as shown.
2 H C O H + 3 O O 2 O C O + 4 H O H
Use the bond energies in the table to determine the energy change, ΔH, for the complete
combustion of one mole of methanol.
bond energy
bond
in kJ / mol
C–H 410
C–O 360
O–H 460
O=O 500
C=O 805
energy needed to brea bonds
.............................. kJ
energy released hen bonds are formed
.............................. kJ
energy change, ΔH, for the complete combustion of one mole of methanol
.............................. kJ / mol
[4]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17

538/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(d) Dodecane is an alkane containing 12 carbon atoms. Ethanol can be manufactured from
dodecane in a two-stage process.
In stage 1, each molecule of dodecane is converted into three molecules of ethene and one
molecule of another hydrocarbon.
(i) Name the process which occurs in stage 1.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction which occurs in stage 1.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
In stage 2, ethene reacts with steam to produce ethanol.
(iii) State two conditions needed for stage 2.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Name the type of reaction which occurs in stage 2.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Suggest how to test the purity of the ethanol produced.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

539/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(e) Ethanol can also be manufactured by the fermentation of glucose, C6H12O6.
(i) State two conditions needed for the fermentation of glucose.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Complete the chemical equation for the fermentation of glucose.
C6H12O6 ......C2H5OH + ..............................

[2]
(iii) One disadvantage of fermentation is that the maximum concentration of ethanol produced
is about 15%.
Suggest why the concentration of ethanol produced by fermentation does not exceed
15%.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Give one other disadvantage of manufacturing ethanol by fermentation.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Give one advantage, other than cost, of manufacturing ethanol by fermentation.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) Suggest the name of a process to obtain ethanol from a mixture of ethanol and water.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17

540/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(f) Ethane-1,2-diol has the following structure.
H H
H O C C O H
H H
(i) Write the empirical formula of ethane-1,2-diol.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Ethane-1,2-diol can undergo condensation polymerisation but cannot undergo addition
polymerisation.
Explain why ethane-1,2-diol cannot undergo addition polymerisation.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Ethane-1,2-diol undergoes condensation polymerisation with molecule Y.
The diagrams represent the structures of ethane-1,2-diol and molecule Y.
O O
H O O H H O C C O H
ethane-1,2-diol molecule Y
Draw the condensation polymer formed between ethane-1,2-diol and molecule Y.

Show one repeat unit. Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the linkage.
[3]
(iv) Name the type of condensation polymer formed between ethane-1,2-diol and molecule Y.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 30]

541/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
4 A student sets up the following electrolysis experiment.
bulb
wire
+ –
graphite electrodes
dilute aqueous
sodium chloride
(a) Define the term electrolysis.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The student observes bubbles of colourless gas forming at each electrode.
(i) Name the main gas produced at the positive electrode (anode).
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe a test for the gas produced in (b)(i).
test ......................................................................................................................................
result ...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction taking place at the negative electrode
(cathode).
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Charge is transferred during electrolysis.
Name the type of particle responsible for the transfer of charge in
the wires, ...................................................................................................................................
the electrolyte. ...........................................................................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17

542/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(d) The student replaces the dilute aqueous sodium chloride with concentrated aqueous
sodium chloride.
Suggest two differences that the student observes.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) The student has a small piece of impure copper. The main impurities in the copper are small
quantities of silver and zinc.
The student uses electrolysis to extract pure copper from the small piece of impure copper.
(i) Complete the labels on the diagram of the student’s electrolysis experiment.
anode made of cathode made of

+ –
......................................... .........................................
electrolyte of
.......................................................
[3]
(ii) Use your knowledge of the reactivity series to suggest what happens to the silver and zinc
impurities. Explain your answers.
silver impurities ...................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
zinc impurities .....................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 17]

543/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
5 Some chemical reactions are reversible.
(a) Aqueous potassium chromate(VI), K2CrO4, is a yellow solution.
Aqueous potassium dichromate(VI), K2Cr2O7, is an orange solution.
The two compounds interconvert when the pH of the solution changes.
2K2CrO4 + H2SO4 K2Cr2O7 + K2SO4 + H2O

yellow orange
Solution Y is a mixture of aqueous potassium chromate(VI) and aqueous

potassium dichromate(VI) at equilibrium.
E plain, in terms of the position of the e uilibrium, hat you ould see if sulfuric acid were
added to solution Y.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
E plain, in terms of the position of the e uilibrium, hat you ould see if sodium hydroxide
were added to solution Y.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[5]
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17

544/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(b) Hydrogen can be manufactured using a reversible reaction between methane and steam.
CH4(g) + H2O(g) CO(g) + 3H2(g)
At 900 °C, in the presence of a nickel catalyst, the yield of hydrogen is 70%.
(i) What volume of hydrogen is produced from 100 cm3 of methane under these conditions?
.............................. cm3 [2]
Under different conditions, different yields of hydrogen are obtained.
(ii) If the pressure is increased, the yield of hydrogen becomes less than 70%.
Explain why, in terms of the position of the equilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) If the temperature is decreased, the yield of hydrogen decreases.
What does this information indicate about the reaction between methane and steam?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Why is a catalyst used in this reaction?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

545/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17

546/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0620/42/O/N/17

547/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
548/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/O/N/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*64
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
123383*
1 hour 15 minutes

IB17 11_0620_43/5RP
549/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Substances can be classified as elements, compounds or mi tures.
State hether each of the follo ing is an element, a compound or a mi ture.
(a) brass .................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) gold ...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) butane .................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) air ......................................................................................................................................... [1]
Total
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/O/N/17

550/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 (a) (i) Define the term molecule.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Define the term element.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The table sho s the composition of four atoms or ions, A, B, C and D.

A 10 10 10
B 10 12 10
C 12 10 10
D 13 1 10
(i) What is the atomic number of A?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the nucleon number of B?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Which of A, B, C and D are isotopes of each other
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Which of A, B, C and D are atoms
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Which of A, B, C and D are positive ions
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Complete the table.
number of number of
protons electrons
Na
S2–
Cl 2
[3]
Total 11

551/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 Iron is e tracted from its ore using co e in a blast furnace.
waste gases
raw materials:
coke,
iron ore,
limestone
air air
slag
molten iron
(a) Name the ore of iron hich is mainly iron III o ide.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Describe the reactions occurring in the blast furnace.
In your ans er, include

two reasons for using co e in the blast furnace,
a chemical e uation for the reduction of iron III o ide,
an e planation for using limestone in the blast furnace.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/O/N/17

552/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(c) (i) Describe the bonding in iron. Include a diagram in your ans er.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) se your diagram in (c)(i) to e plain hy iron is malleable.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Iron containing a small amount of carbon is no n as steel.
E plain hy steel is less malleable than iron.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) (i) When iron is added to dilute sulfuric acid, an a ueous solution of iron II sulfate is formed
as one of the products.
Write a chemical e uation for the reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) When iron III o ide is added to dilute sulfuric acid, an a ueous solution of iron III sulfate
is formed as one of the products.
Write a chemical e uation for the reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

553/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(e) ueous sodium hydro ide, a ueous potassium iodide and a ueous acidified
potassium manganate VII are added to a ueous solutions of iron II sulfate and
iron III sulfate.
Iron II ions, e2+, are reducing agents in a ueous solution.

Iron III ions, e3+, are o idising agents in a ueous solution.
Complete the table.
observations ith observations ith

reagent
a ueous iron II sulfate a ueous iron III sulfate
a ueous sodium hydro ide green precipitate
a ueous potassium iodide
a ueous acidified
no change
potassium manganate VII)
Total 22
4 ydrogen and o ygen react together in a hydrogen fuel cell. hydrogen fuel cell is sho n in the
diagram.
hydrogen oxygen
H2 O2
electrolyte
water
membrane
(a) Name the process by hich o ygen is obtained from air.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/O/N/17

554/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(b) (i) In a hydrogen fuel cell, the hydrogen molecules are converted into hydrogen ions, +
,
according to the ionic half e uation sho n.
H2 2H+ + 2e–
What type of reaction does this ionic half e uation represent
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What type of substance reacts by donating hydrogen ions, +

?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Write a chemical e uation for the overall reaction that occurs in a hydrogen fuel cell.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) ydrogen fuel cells are being developed as alternatives to petrol engines in cars.
(i) Give one advantage of hydrogen fuel cells compared to petrol engines.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give one disadvantage of hydrogen fuel cells compared to petrol engines.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Some fuel cells use ethanol, C2H5 , instead of hydrogen. Carbon dio ide and ater are
products of the reaction in an ethanol fuel cell.
(i) Write a chemical e uation for the overall reaction occurring in an ethanol fuel cell.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State an environmental problem caused by the release of carbon dio ide into the
atmosphere.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the process by hich ethanol can be manufactured from a rene able resource.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f) Name the process occurring hen electrical energy is used to brea do n an ionic compound.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
Total 11

555/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 (a) (i) Name the products formed hen sodium nitrate is heated.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) When copper II nitrate, Cu N 3)2, undergoes thermal decomposition, three products are
formed. ne of the products is nitrogen dio ide, N 2.
Write a chemical e uation for the thermal decomposition of copper II nitrate.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The chemical e uation sho s the e uilibrium bet een dinitrogen tetro ide N2O , a colourless
gas and nitrogen dio ide N 2, a bro n gas .
N 2O g 2NO2 g
colourless bro n
mi ture of dinitrogen tetro ide and nitrogen dio ide is allo ed to reach e uilibrium in a
closed gas syringe.
(i) In chemistry, hat is meant by the term equilibrium?
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) If the e uilibrium mi ture is heated at constant pressure, a dar er bro n colour is seen
inside the gas syringe.
What does this information indicate about the decomposition of dinitrogen tetro ide
E plain your ans er in terms of the position of the e uilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest hat you ould see if the pressure on the e uilibrium mi ture ere increased at
constant temperature.
E plain your ans er in terms of the position of the e uilibrium.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
Total 1
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/O/N/17

556/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
6 (a) l anes and al enes are t o homologous series of hydrocarbons.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the general formula of the homologous series of
al anes, ..............................................................................................................................
al enes .............................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) ther than having a general formula, state two characteristics of a homologous series.
1 ..........................................................................................................................................
2 ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) The structure of an al ene molecule ith the molecular formula C H8 is sho n.
H H H H
C C C C H
H H H
Dra the structure of a different al ene molecule ith the molecular formula C H8. Sho
all of the atoms and all of the bonds.
[1]
(v) What term describes molecules ith the same molecular formula but different structural
formulae
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

557/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(b) 2 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon, CxHy, ere burnt in 1 cm3 of o ygen. This as an e cess
of o ygen.
fter cooling, the volume of the gases remaining as 1 cm3. This consisted of cm3 of
carbon dio ide and 2 cm of unreacted o ygen. The ater that as produced in the reaction
3
as li uid.
ll volumes ere measured at the same temperature and pressure.
(i) What is meant by an excess of o ygen
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What as the volume of o ygen that reacted ith the hydrocarbon
............................. cm3 [1]
(iii) Complete the table to sho the smallest hole number ratio of volumes.
volume of
volume of volume of
: : carbon dio ide
hydrocarbon reacted o ygen reacted
produced
smallest hole
number ratio of : :
volumes
[1]
(iv) se your ans er to (b)(iii) to balance the chemical e uation. Deduce the formula of the
hydrocarbon.
CxHy g ...... 2 g ......C 2 g ...... 2 l
formula of the hydrocarbon ............................. 2
Total 12
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/O/N/17

558/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
7 (a) Carbon and silicon are elements in Group I of the eriodic Table.
Carbon dio ide from the air moves into green plants and is converted into carbohydrates.
(i) Name the process by hich carbon dio ide molecules move through the air into green
plants.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) E plain hy silicon IV o ide cannot move through the air in the same ay that
carbon dio ide can.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the process by hich carbon dio ide is converted into glucose, C6H12O6, in green
plants. Give two conditions re uired for this process to occur. Write a chemical e uation
for the reaction hich occurs.
name of process .................................................................................................................
condition 1 ..........................................................................................................................
condition 2 ..........................................................................................................................
chemical e uation ...............................................................................................................

[5]
(b) Starch is a natural polymer made from glucose.
(i) What type of polymerisation occurs hen glucose is converted into starch
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What type of reaction occurs hen starch is converted into glucose
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Starch can be represented as sho n.
O O O O
Complete the diagram belo to represent the structure of the glucose monomer.
[1]
Total 1
© UCLES 2017 0620/43/O/N/17

559/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2017
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
560/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/O/N/17
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*9003309678*
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes

IB15 03_0620_42/7RP
561/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 (a) The table below gives information about particles.
Complete the table. The first line has been done for you.
number of number of electronic charge on

particle
protons electrons configuration particle
A 12 10 2,8 2+
B 18 2,8,8 1–
C 18 2,8,8 0
D 8 10
[4]
(b) Gallium is a Group III element.
Define the term element.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The following are gallium atoms.
69 71
31
Ga 31 Ga
Complete the following table.

atom
69
31
Ga
71
31 Ga
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/F/M/16

562/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Rubidium, Rb, is a Group I element. It has similar physical and chemical properties to the other
elements in Group I.
(a) Predict how many electrons there are in the outer shell of a rubidium atom.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Predict one physical property of rubidium which is the same as that of a transition element
such as iron.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Predict two physical properties of rubidium which are different to those of a transition element
such as iron.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) When rubidium is added to cold water a reaction occurs.
(i) Suggest two observations that would be made when rubidium is added to cold water.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What would be the colour of the solution if methyl orange was added to it after the reaction?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between rubidium and water.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iv) Put the Group I elements, caesium, lithium, potassium, rubidium and sodium in their order
of reactivity with water. Put the most reactive element first.
most reactive least reactive
[1]
(v) Suggest one safety measure that should be used when rubidium is added to cold water.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) The phosphate ion has the formula PO43–.
Deduce the formula of rubidium phosphate.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 12]

563/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 Carbon dioxide and silicon(IV) oxide are oxides of Group IV elements.
(a) Complete the following table.
carbon dioxide silicon(IV) oxide
formula SiO2
melting point / °C –56 1610
physical state at 25 °C gas
conduction of electricity non-conductor
structure macromolecular
[4]
(b) (i) Name the type of bonds that exist between the atoms in silicon(IV) oxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why silicon(IV) oxide has a very high melting point.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain, in terms of attractive forces between particles, why carbon dioxide has a very low
melting point.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Explain, in terms of particles, why carbon dioxide is a non-conductor of electricity.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Suggest a chemical equation for the reaction between sodium hydroxide solution and
carbon dioxide.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/F/M/16

564/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(d) (i) Name the type of chemical reaction in which carbon dioxide is produced from fossil fuels.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the chemical process in which green plants convert carbon dioxide into carbohydrates.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Name the chemical process in which living things produce carbon dioxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 13]

565/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 Hydrogen peroxide, H2O2, decomposes into water and oxygen in the presence of a catalyst,
manganese(IV) oxide.
2H2O2(aq) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g)
(a) What is meant by the term catalyst?
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A student studies the rate of decomposition of hydrogen peroxide using the apparatus shown.
The student uses 20 cm3 of 0.1 mol / dm3 hydrogen peroxide and 1.0 g of manganese(IV) oxide.
The student measures the volume of oxygen given off at regular time intervals until the reaction
stops. A graph of the results is shown.
gas syringe
hydrogen peroxide
catalyst
volume
of oxygen
produced / cm3
0
0 time / s
(i) When is the rate of reaction highest?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest one method of increasing the rate of reaction using the same amounts of hydrogen
peroxide and manganese(IV) oxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/F/M/16

566/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(c) (i) Calculate the number of moles of hydrogen peroxide used in this experiment.
................. mol [1]
(ii) Use your answer to (c)(i) and the equation to calculate the number of moles of oxygen
produced in the reaction.
2H2O2(aq) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g)
................. mol [1]
(iii) Calculate the volume (at r.t.p.) of oxygen produced.
................. dm3 [1]
(iv) What would be the effect on the volume of oxygen produced if the mass of catalyst was
increased?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Deduce the volume of oxygen that would be produced if 20 cm3 of 0.2 mol / dm3 hydrogen
peroxide was used instead of 20 cm3 of 0.1 mol / dm3 hydrogen peroxide.
................. dm3 [1]

567/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(d) The student carries out a second experiment to investigate whether another substance,
copper(II) oxide, is a better catalyst than manganese(IV) oxide.
Describe how the second experiment is carried out. You should state clearly how you would
make sure that the catalyst is the only variable.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/F/M/16

568/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 This question is about compounds of nitrogen.
(a) (i) Describe the Haber Process giving reaction conditions and a chemical equation.
Reference to rate and yield is not required.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [5]
(ii) Give one use of ammonia.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The diagram shows the structure of a hydrazine molecule.
H H
N N
H H
Draw the electron arrangement of a hydrazine molecule. Show the outer shell electrons only.
[2]
(c) Hydrazine is a base.
(i) Define the term base.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the chemical equation to show that hydrazine acts as a base when added to
water.
N2H4 + H2O → .............. + .............. [1]

569/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(d) Nitrogen dioxide is an atmospheric pollutant.
(i) State one environmental problem caused by nitrogen dioxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how oxides of nitrogen, such as nitrogen dioxide, are formed in car engines.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/F/M/16

570/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
6 Iron pyrite, FeS2, is known as Fool’s Gold because it is a shiny yellow solid which is similar in
appearance to gold. Iron pyrite is an ionic compound. Gold is a metallic element.
(a) Iron pyrite, FeS2, contains positive and negative ions. The positive ion is Fe2+.
Deduce the formula of the negative ion.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A student is provided with a sample of iron pyrite and a sample of gold.
Suggest how the student could distinguish between the two substances.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Sulfur dioxide is produced on a large scale by heating iron pyrite strongly in air. The iron pyrite
reacts with oxygen in the air producing iron(III) oxide, Fe2O3, and sulfur dioxide.
(i) Construct a chemical equation for the reaction between iron pyrite and oxygen.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give one use of sulfur dioxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

571/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
7 (a) Alkanes and alkenes are examples of hydrocarbons.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give the general formula of straight-chain
alkanes, ..............................................................................................................................
alkenes. ..............................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A compound X contains carbon, hydrogen and oxygen only.
X contains 54.54% of carbon by mass, 9.09% of hydrogen by mass and 36.37% of oxygen by
mass.
(i) Calculate the empirical formula of compound X.
[2]
(ii) Compound X has a relative molecular mass of 88.
Deduce the molecular formula of compound X.
[2]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/F/M/16

572/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(c) An ester has the molecular formula C3H6O2.
Name and give the structural formulae of two esters with the molecular formula C3H6O2.
name of ester
structural formula
[4]
(d) Name the ester produced from the reaction of propanoic acid and methanol.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) A polyester is represented by the structure shown.
O O
C C O O
(i) What type of polymerisation is used for the production of polyesters?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Which simple molecule is removed when the polyester is formed?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Complete the diagrams below to show the structures of the monomers used to produce
the polyester. Show all atoms and bonds.
C C O O
[2]
[Total: 16]

573/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/F/M/16

574/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/F/M/16

575/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
© UCLES 2016
Group
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
576/684
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
0620/42/F/M/16
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.)
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*4054381962*
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
1 hour 15 minutes

IB16 06_0620_41/4RP
577/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Protons, neutrons and electrons are subatomic particles.
(a) Complete the table to show the relative mass and relative charge of a proton, a neutron and an
electron.
particle relative mass relative charge
proton
neutron
1
electron
1840
[3]
(b) Bromine has two isotopes.
(i) Define the term isotope.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the two isotopes of bromine have the same chemical properties.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The table shows the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in some atoms and ions.
Complete the table.

particle
7
3 Li
34 2-
16 S
19 22 18
[5]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/M/J/16

578/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Period 3 contains the elements sodium to argon. This question asks about the chemistry of each of
the Period 3 elements or their compounds.
(a) Sodium nitrate is a white crystalline solid. When heated it melts and the following reaction
occurs.
2NaNO3(l) → 2NaNO2(l) + O2(g)
A 3.40 g sample of sodium nitrate is heated.
Calculate the
number of moles of NaNO3 used,
.................................. mol
number of moles of O2 formed,
.................................. mol
volume of O2 formed, in dm3 (measured at r.t.p.).
.................................. dm3
[3]
(b) Magnesium reacts slowly with warm water to form a base, magnesium hydroxide.
(i) Explain what is meant by the term base.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between magnesium and warm water.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

579/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(c) Aluminium oxide is amphoteric. It is insoluble in water.
Describe experiments to show that aluminium oxide is amphoteric.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Silicon(IV) oxide has a giant structure.
(i) Name the type of bonding in silicon(IV) oxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give two physical properties of silicon(IV) oxide.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Calcium phosphate is used in fertilisers. The bonding in calcium phosphate is ionic.
Calcium phosphate contains the phosphate ion, PO43–.
(i) What is ionic bonding?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Deduce the formula of calcium phosphate.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/M/J/16

580/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(f) Sulfur tetrafluoride, S 4, can be made by combining gaseous sulfur with fluorine.
Sg 2 2(g) → S 4(g)
(i) Complete the energy level diagram for this reaction. Include an arrow which clearly shows
the energy change during the reaction.
S(g) + 2F2(g)
energy
[3]
(ii) During the reaction the amount of energy given out is 780 kJ / mol.
The bond energy is 1 / mol.
se this information to determine the bond energy, in / mol, of one S bond in S 4.
S + F F → F S F
F F
F
.................................. kJ / mol [3]

581/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(g) Chlorine and compounds of chlorine are important in water treatment and in laboratory testing
for water.
(i) Chlorine is added to water to make the water safe to drink.
Explain why adding chlorine makes water safe to drink.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A compound of chlorine is used in the laboratory to test for the presence of water.
Name the compound of chlorine used in this test and describe the colour change seen in
a positive result of this test.
name of compound .............................................................................................................
colour change from ................................................... to ...................................................

[3]
(h) Argon is an unreactive noble gas.
(i) Explain why argon is unreactive.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give one use of argon.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 27]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/M/J/16

582/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7

583/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
3 When aqueous sodium thiosulfate and dilute hydrochloric acid are mixed, a precipitate of insoluble
sulfur is produced. This ma es the mi ture difficult to see through.
Na2S2O3(aq) + 2HCl (aq) → S(s) + 2NaCl (aq) + H2O(l) + SO2(g)
The time taken for the cross to disappear from view is measured.
A student adds the following volumes of aqueous sodium thiosulfate, dilute hydrochloric acid and
distilled water to the conical flas .
The time taken for the formation of the precipitate of sulfur to make the cross disappear from view
is recorded.
experiment volume of volume of volume of time taken for

number sodium thiosulfate hydrochloric acid distilled water cross to disappear
/ cm3 / cm3 / cm3 from view / s
1 10 10 40 56
2 20 10 30 28
(a) State the order in which the aqueous sodium thiosulfate, hydrochloric acid and distilled water
should be added to the flas .
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/M/J/16

584/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(b) In experiment 3 the student wanted the sodium thiosulfate to be double the concentration used
in experiment 2.
(i) Complete the table to show the volumes which should be used and the expected time
taken for the cross to disappear from view in experiment 3. [2]
(ii) Use collision theory to explain why increasing the concentration of sodium thiosulfate
would change the rate of reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The student repeated experiment 1 at a higher temperature.
Use collision theory to explain why the rate of reaction would increase.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

585/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
4 Electroplating steel objects with silver involves a three-step process.
step 1 A coating of copper is applied to the object.
step 2 A coating of nickel is applied to the object.
step 3 The coating of silver is applied to the object.
(a) A diagram of the apparatus used for step 1 is shown.
+ –
copper (anode)
steel object (cathode)
aqueous copper(II) sulfate

electrolyte
(i) The chemical process taking place on the surface of the object is
Cu2+(aq) + 2e– → Cu(s)
Explain whether this process is oxidation or reduction.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the concentration of copper ions in the electrolyte remains constant throughout
step 1.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/M/J/16

586/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(b) Give two changes which would be needed in order to coat nickel onto the object in step 2.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Copper, nickel and silver are transition elements.

Typical physical properties of transition elements are a high density and a high melting point.
Give three different properties of transition metals which are not typical of other metals.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

587/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
5 Sulfuric acid is produced by the Contact process. The steps of the Contact process are shown.
starting step 1 sulfur step 2 sulfur step 3 oleum

step 4 sulfuric
material dioxide trioxide acid
(a) Sulfur is a common starting material for the Contact process.
Name a source of sulfur.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Describe step 2, giving reaction conditions and a chemical equation. Reference to reaction
rate and yield is not required.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(c) Step 3 involves adding sulfur trioxide to concentrated sulfuric acid to form oleum.
H2SO4 + SO3 → ................................

[1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/M/J/16

588/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(d) Dilute sulfuric acid is a typical acid.
A student adds excess dilute sulfuric acid to a sample of solid copper(II) carbonate in a
test-tube.
(i) Give three observations the student would make.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Give the names of all products formed.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Concentrated sulfuric acid has different properties to dilute sulfuric acid.
When concentrated sulfuric acid is added to glucose, C6H12O6, steam is given off and a black
solid is formed.
(i) Name the black solid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What type of reaction has occurred?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]

589/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
6 Petroleum is a source of many important chemicals.
(a) Name two industrial processes which must take place to produce alkenes from petroleum.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Ethene, CH2=CH2, and propene, CH2=CHCH3, can both be converted into polymers.
(i) What type of polymerisation takes place when ethene forms a polymer?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the empirical formula of the polymer formed from ethene?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Propene has the structural formula CH2=CHCH3.
Draw two repeat units of the polymer made from propene.
[2]
(c) Ethene will react with steam to form ethanol.
Propene will react with steam to form two isomers, both of which are alcohols.
Suggest the structures of these alcohols.
[2]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/M/J/16

590/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
(d) Esters are organic chemicals noted for their characteristic smells. Ethanoic acid and methanol
will react to form an ester.
(i) Name the catalyst needed to form an ester from ethanoic acid and methanol.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the ester formed when ethanoic acid reacts with methanol.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Draw the structure of the ester formed when ethanoic acid reacts with methanol. Show all
bonds.
[2]
(iv) Give the name of a polyester.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/M/J/16

591/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2016
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
592/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/M/J/16
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*3291778503*
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes

IB16 06_0620_42/3RP
593/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 (a) For each of the following, give the name of an element from Period 2 (lithium to neon), which
matches the description.
Elements may be used once, more than once or not at all.
(i) an element which is gaseous at room temperature and pressure
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) an element which forms an oxide that is a reactant in photosynthesis
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) an element that is a product of photosynthesis
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) an element that makes up approximately 78% by volume of the air
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) an element which has atoms with a full outer shell of electrons
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vi) an element which exists as both diamond and graphite
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(vii) an element that reacts vigorously with cold water
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(viii) a soft metallic element which is stored in oil
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Give the formula of a compound that contains
(i) only boron and oxygen, ................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) only lithium and nitrogen. .............................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16

594/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 (a) (i) Define the term atomic number.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Define the term nucleon number.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The table shows the number of protons, neutrons and electrons in some atoms or ions.
Complete the table. The first line is given as an e ample.
number of number of number of symbol or

particle
protons electrons neutrons formula
12
A 6 6 6 6C
B 12 12 12
C 8 16 2-
8O
D 11 10 13
[6]
[Total: 9]

595/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 Gallium is a metallic element in Group III. It has similar properties to aluminium.
(a) (i) Describe the structure and bonding in a metallic element.

You should include a labelled diagram in your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain why metallic elements such as gallium are good conductors of electricity.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Give the formula of
gallium(III) chloride, ..................................................................................................................
gallium(III) sulfate. ....................................................................................................................

[2]
(c) Gallium(III) oxide, Ga2O3, is amphoteric.
(i) Write the chemical equation for the reaction between gallium(III) oxide and dilute nitric
acid to form a salt and water only.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The reaction between gallium(III) oxide and sodium hydroxide solution forms only water
and a salt containing the negative ion Ga2O42–.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Alloys of gallium and other elements are often more useful than the metallic element itself.
Suggest two reasons why alloys of gallium are more useful than the metallic element.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16

596/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
4 Hydrogen can be manufactured from methane by steam reforming.
CH4(g) + H2O(g) CO(g) + 3H2(g)
The reaction is carried out using a nickel catalyst at temperatures between 700 °C and 1100 °C and
using a pressure of one atmosphere.
The forward reaction is endothermic.
(a) What is meant by the term catalyst?
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Suggest two reasons why a temperature lower than 700 °C is not used.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Suggest one advantage of using a pressure greater than one atmosphere.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Suggest one disadvantage of using a pressure greater than one atmosphere.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) Hydrogen can also be manufactured by electrolysis. The electrolyte is concentrated aqueous
sodium chloride. The electrodes are inert.
The products of electrolysis are hydrogen, chlorine and sodium hydroxide.
(i) Define the term electrolysis.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name a substance that can be used as the inert electrodes.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction in which hydrogen is produced.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Where is hydrogen produced in the electrolytic cell?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

597/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(v) Describe a test for chlorine.
test ......................................................................................................................................
result ...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(f) The electrolysis of concentrated aqueous sodium chloride can be represented by the following
word equation.
sodium chloride + water → sodium hydroxide + hydrogen + chlorine
Construct a chemical equation to represent this reaction. Do not include state symbols.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(g) State one use of
chlorine, .....................................................................................................................................
sodium hydroxide, .....................................................................................................................
hydrogen. ...................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16

598/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
5 (a) Hydrocarbons are compounds which contain hydrogen and carbon only.
• 10 cm3 of a gaseous hydrocarbon, CxHy, are burned in 100 cm3 of oxygen, which is an
excess of oxygen.
• After cooling to room temperature and pressure, there is 25 cm3 of unreacted oxygen,
50 cm3 of carbon dioxide and some liquid water.
All volumes are measured under the same conditions of temperature and pressure.
(i) What is meant by an excess of oxygen?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What was the volume of oxygen that reacted with the hydrocarbon?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Complete the table below to express the smallest whole number ratio of
volume of
volume of volume of
: : carbon dioxide
hydrocarbon reacted oxygen reacted
produced
volume of
volume of volume of
carbon dioxide
hydrocarbon reacted oxygen reacted
produced
smallest whole
number ratio of
volumes
[1]
(iv) Use your answer to (a)(iii) to find the mole ratio in the equation below. Complete the
equation and deduce the formula of the hydrocarbon.
.........CxHy(g) + .........O2(g) → .........CO2(g) + .........H2O(l)
formula of hydrocarbon = ...........................................

[2]

599/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(b) Cracking is used to convert long chain alkanes into shorter chain alkanes and alkenes. Alkenes
are unsaturated compounds.
Decane, C10H22, can be cracked to give propene and one other product.
(i) Complete the chemical equation.
C10H22 → C3H6 + ...............

[1]
(ii) What is meant by the term unsaturated?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Describe a test to show that propene is an unsaturated compound.
test ......................................................................................................................................
result ...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Propene can be polymerised. The only product is polypropene. The equation for the
polymerisation is:
CH3 H
nC3H6 C C
H H n
(i) Name the type of polymerisation that occurs.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Deduce the maximum mass of polypropene that could be produced from 1 kg of propene.
............... kg [1]
(iii) Give the empirical formula of
propene, .............................................................................................................................
polypropene. .......................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16

600/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
6 Zinc is extracted from an ore called zinc blende, which consists mainly of zinc sulfide, ZnS.
(a) (i) The zinc sulfide in the ore is first converted into zinc oxide.
Describe how zinc oxide is made from zinc sulfide.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction in (a)(i).
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Zinc oxide is converted into zinc. Zinc oxide and coke are fed into a furnace. Hot air is blown
into the bottom of the furnace.
Zinc has a melting point of 420 °C and a boiling point of 907 °C. The temperature inside the
furnace is over 1000 °C.
(i) Explain how zinc oxide is converted into zinc. Your answer should include details of how
the heat is produced and equations for all the reactions you describe.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain why the zinc produced inside the furnace is a gas.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name of the physical change for conversion of gaseous zinc into molten zinc.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

601/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
(c) Rusting of steel can be prevented by coating the steel with a layer of zinc.
Explain, in terms of electron transfer, why steel does not rust even if the layer of zinc is
scratched so that the steel is exposed to air and water.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(d) When a sample of steel is added to dilute hydrochloric acid, an aqueous solution of
iron(II) chloride, FeCl 2, is formed.
When a sample of rust is added to dilute hydrochloric acid, an aqueous solution of

iron(III) chloride, FeCl 3, is formed.
(i) Aqueous sodium hydroxide is added to the solutions of iron(II) chloride and
iron(III) chloride.
Complete the table below, showing the observations you would expect to make.
iron(II) chloride solution iron(III) chloride solution
aqueous
sodium hydroxide
[2]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16

602/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
Solutions of iron(II) chloride and iron(III) chloride were added to solutions of potassium iodide
and acidified potassium manganate(VII). The results are shown in the table.
iron(II) chloride iron(III) chloride

solution solution
solution turns
potassium
no change from colourless
iodide solution
to brown
acidified potassium solution turns

manganate(VII) from purple no change
solution to colourless
(ii) What types of substance cause potassium iodide solution to turn from colourless to
brown?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What types of substance cause acidified potassium manganate(VII) solution to turn from
purple to colourless?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) Which ion in iron(III) chloride solution causes potassium iodide solution to turn from
colourless to brown?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(v) Which ion in iron(II) chloride solution causes acidified potassium manganate(VII) solution
to turn from purple to colourless?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 18]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/M/J/16

603/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2016
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
604/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/M/J/16
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*2399434482*
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
1 hour 15 minutes

IB16 06_0620_43/3RP
605/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The diagram shows a blast furnace.
waste gases
raw materials:
coke, C
iron ore, Fe2O3
limestone, CaCO3
(a) The following equations represent reactions which take place in the blast furnace.
A C + O2 → CO2
B CaCO3 → CaO + CO2
C CaO + SiO2 → CaSiO3
D CO2 + C → 2CO
E Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2
(i) Which reaction is used to increase the temperature inside the blast furnace? ........... [1]
(ii) Which reaction is an example of thermal decomposition? ........... [1]
(iii) In which reaction is carbon both oxidised and reduced? ........... [1]
(iv) Which equation shows the removal of an impurity from the iron? ........... [1]
(v) Which equation shows the reaction of an acidic substance with a basic substance?
........... [1]
(b) Use the diagram of the blast furnace to help you answer these questions.
(i) What enters the blast furnace at X?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What leaves the blast furnace at Y?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/M/J/16

606/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
(iii) Name two waste gases that leave the blast furnace.
1. .........................................................................................................................................
2. .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The graph shows how the malleability of iron changes as the percentage of carbon in the iron
changes.
high
malleability
low
increasing percentage
of carbon
(i) Describe how the malleability of iron changes as the percentage of carbon changes.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Iron obtained from the blast furnace contains high levels of carbon.
Explain how the amount of carbon in the iron can be decreased.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 12]

607/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
2 The structures of six organic compounds are shown.
A B C
H H H H H H H O
H C C C C H C C H C C
H H H H H O H
D E F
H H H H H H H
H C C H H C H H C C C C H
H H
H O H H H H
H H C C C H
H H H
(a) Give the name of F.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Identify two of the compounds that are members of the same homologous series.
Give the general formula of this homologous series.
compounds ................................................................................................................................
general formula ..........................................................................................................................

[2]
(c) Which two compounds are isomers of each other?

Explain why they are isomers.
compounds ................................................................................................................................
explanation ................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) Explain why B is an unsaturated hydrocarbon.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/M/J/16

608/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(e) Describe how D is manufactured from B. Give a chemical equation for the reaction.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(f) Compound A forms an addition polymer.
Draw two repeat units of the addition polymer formed from A.
[2]
[Total: 13]

609/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
3 Clean dry air contains mainly nitrogen and oxygen.
(a) Name two other gases that are in clean dry air.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Air often contains pollutants.
Identify three common gaseous pollutants in air and state how each of these pollutants are
produced.
pollutant gas 1 ...........................................................................................................................
how it is produced ......................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
pollutant gas 2 ...........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
pollutant gas 3 ...........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[6]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/M/J/16

610/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
4 (a) Potassium iodide is an ionic compound.
(i) Describe what happens, in terms of electron loss and gain, when a potassium atom reacts
with an iodine atom.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe the structure of solid potassium iodide. You may draw a diagram.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Explain why potassium iodide has a high melting point.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]

611/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(b) Potassium iodide and lead nitrate are both soluble. Lead iodide is insoluble.
(i) Describe how a pure dry sample of lead iodide could be made from solid potassium iodide
and solid lead nitrate.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) Write an ionic equation for the formation of lead iodide, PbI2, when potassium iodide and
lead nitrate react with each other.
State symbols are not required.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) When chlorine gas is bubbled through an aqueous solution of potassium iodide, a redox
reaction takes place.
2I – + Cl 2 → I2 + 2Cl –
(i) State the colour change expected in this reaction.
start colour ..........................................................................................................................
end colour ...........................................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) Identify the reducing agent in this reaction. Explain your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 16]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/M/J/16

612/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
5 Dilute hydrochloric acid reacts with sodium carbonate solution.
2HCl (aq) + Na2CO3(aq) → 2NaCl (aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)
(a) Explain why effervescence is seen during the reaction.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Dilute hydrochloric acid was titrated with sodium carbonate solution.
• 10.0 cm3 of 0.100 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid were placed in a conical flask.
• A few drops of methyl orange indicator were added to the dilute hydrochloric acid.
• The mixture was titrated with sodium carbonate solution.
• 16.2 cm3 of sodium carbonate solution were required to react completely with the acid.
(i) What colour would the methyl orange indicator be in the hydrochloric acid?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate how many moles of hydrochloric acid were used.
............................ mol [1]
(iii) Use your answer to (b)(ii) and the equation for the reaction to calculate the number of
moles of sodium carbonate that reacted.
............................ mol [1]
(iv) Use your answer to (b)(iii) to calculate the concentration of the sodium carbonate solution
in mol / dm3.
............................ mol / dm3 [2]
(c) In another experiment, 0.020 mol of sodium carbonate were reacted with excess hydrochloric
acid.
Calculate the maximum volume (at r.t.p.) of carbon dioxide gas that could be made in this
reaction.
............................ dm3 [3]
[Total: 9]

613/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 Concentrated ammonia solution gives off ammonia gas. Concentrated hydrochloric acid gives off
hydrogen chloride gas. Ammonia, NH3, and hydrogen chloride, HCl, are both colourless gases.
Ammonia reacts with hydrogen chloride to make the white solid ammonium chloride.
Apparatus is set up as shown.
cotton wool cotton wool

soaked in concentrated soaked in concentrated
hydrochloric acid ammonia solution
A B C D
glass tube
After ten minutes a white solid forms in the tube where the gases meet.
(a) (i) Write the chemical equation for the reaction of ammonia with hydrogen chloride.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the process by which the ammonia and hydrogen chloride gases move in the tube.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) At which point, A, B, C or D, does the white solid form? Explain why the white solid forms
at that point.
the solid forms at ..............
explanation .........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(iv) The experiment was repeated at a higher temperature.
Predict how the results of the experiment would be different. Explain your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/M/J/16

614/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(b) Some of the white solid is removed from the tube and dissolved in water.
Describe how the white solid could be tested to show it contains,
(i) ammonium ions,
test ......................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
result ...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) chloride ions.
test ......................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
result ...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) The diagram shows the electron arrangement in a molecule of ammonia, showing only outer
shell electrons.
N H
(i) State the type of bonding in ammonia.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]

615/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
(ii) Hydrazine, N2H4, is another compound of nitrogen and hydrogen.
Complete the diagram to show the electron arrangement in a molecule of hydrazine,

showing only outer shell electrons.
H H
N N
H H
[3]
(d) Nylon and proteins are both polymers containing nitrogen.
(i) Name the linkages found in the polymers of nylon and protein.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe one difference in the structures of nylon and protein.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) What is the general name given to the products of hydrolysis of proteins?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/M/J/16

616/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(e) Suggest the structure of the monomer used to make the polymer shown.
H O
N C
n
[1]
[Total: 22]

617/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/M/J/16

618/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/M/J/16

619/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2016
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
620/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/M/J/16
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*6396621448*
CHEMISTRY 0620/41
1 hour 15 minutes

IB16 11_0620_41/3RP
621/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The table gives some information about five substances.
electrical electrical
melting point boiling point solubility
substance conductivity conductivity
/ °C / °C in water
when molten when solid
F –97 65 very soluble does not conduct does not conduct
G 1600 2230 insoluble does not conduct does not conduct
H 801 1413 soluble conducts does not conduct
I –57 126 insoluble does not conduct does not conduct
J 1085 2562 insoluble conducts conducts
(a) Which substance in the table has ionic bonding?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Which substance in the table has a giant covalent structure?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Name a method you could use to separate a mixture of substance J and water.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Name a method you could use to obtain substance F from a mixture of substance F and water.
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Describe how you could obtain a solid sample of substance H from a mixture of substance H
and substance G.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(f) Substance J is a metal.
Describe how substance J is able to conduct electricity when it is a solid.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/O/N/16

622/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Matter can exist as solid, liquid or gas. The arrows show some changes of state.
solid
A B
liquid gas
(a) Name the changes of state represented on the diagram.
(i) A ................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) B ................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) C ................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain why energy has to be supplied to turn a liquid into a gas.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The diagrams represent the same number of particles of a gas in two containers, D and E,
which have different volumes. The two containers are at the same temperature.
D E
In which container will the pressure be higher? Explain your answer.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]

623/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 (a) Petroleum is a mixture of hydrocarbons. It is separated into useful fractions by fractional

distillation. This can be done using the fractionating column shown.
X
O
petroleum
(i) What happens to the petroleum at point X, before it enters the fractionating column?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two ways in which fraction O differs from fraction L.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Most of the hydrocarbons obtained from petroleum are alkanes. The alkanes are an
homologous series of saturated hydrocarbons with the general formula CnH2n+2.
Give two characteristics, other than having the same general formula, of members of an
homologous series.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/O/N/16

624/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(c) The alkane with the molecular formula C5H12 can exist as a number of structural isomers.
Draw the structures of two isomers with the formula C5H12.
[2]
(d) The alkane ethane has the structure shown.
H H
H C C H
H H
When a mixture of ethane and chlorine is exposed to ultraviolet light a substitution reaction
takes place.
Draw the structure of one organic product from this substitution reaction.
[1]

625/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
(e) Isoprene is a naturally occurring hydrocarbon.
(i) Explain how the name of isoprene suggests that it contains a C=C double bond.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A sample of isoprene had the following composition by mass: C, 88.24%; H, 11.76%.
Calculate the empirical formula of isoprene. Show all your working.
(iii) What additional information would be required to calculate the molecular formula of
isoprene?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 13]
4 (a) Ammonia, NH3, is made by reacting nitrogen with hydrogen in the Haber process.
(i) Write a chemical equation for the formation of ammonia in the Haber process.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Name the raw materials from which nitrogen and hydrogen are obtained.
nitrogen ...............................................................................................................................
hydrogen .............................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State the temperature and pressure used in the Haber process. Include the units.
temperature ........................................................................................................................
pressure ..............................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/O/N/16

626/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(b) Ammonia is also made when ammonium carbonate decomposes.
(NH4)2CO3(s) 2NH3(g) + H2O(g) + CO2(g)
The reaction is reversible and can reach a position of equilibrium.
The graph shows how the yield of ammonia at equilibrium changes with temperature and
pressure.
yield of
ammonia 300 °C
100 °C
pressure
(i) What is meant by the term equilibrium for a reversible reaction?
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Using information from the graph, explain whether the reaction is endothermic or
exothermic.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State and explain the effect of increasing the pressure on the yield of ammonia in this
reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]

627/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 Copper(II) sulfate solution was electrolysed using the apparatus shown.
copper wire
carbon anode + – carbon cathode
bubbles of gas copper(II) sulfate

solution
(a) A gas was formed at the anode.
Identify this gas and give the test for this gas.
gas .............................................................................................................................................
test .............................................................................................................................................
result of test ...............................................................................................................................

[3]
(b) During electrolysis, electricity passes through the copper(II) sulfate solution.
Solid copper(II) sulfate does not conduct electricity.
Explain both of these statements.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/O/N/16

628/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(c) The electrolysis was repeated using copper electrodes in place of carbon electrodes. The ionic
half-equations for the reactions at the two electrodes are shown.
anode Cu(s) → Cu2+(aq) + 2e–
cathode Cu2+(aq) + 2e– → Cu(s)
(i) Which species is reduced during the electrolysis? Explain your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The masses of the copper electrodes changed during the electrolysis.
State how and explain why the masses of the two copper electrodes changed.
Use the ionic half-equations to help you.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Explain why, during the electrolysis, the colour of the copper(II) sulfate solution does not
change.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]

629/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 Nylon, Terylene and proteins are all polymers.
(a) What is a polymer?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Proteins are natural polymers. Proteins are biodegradable.
(i) Name the type of linkage in proteins.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is meant by the term biodegradable?
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Name another natural polymer.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/O/N/16

630/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(c) Nylon and Terylene are synthetic polymers.

The repeat unit of nylon can be shown as
O O
C C N N
H H
Terylene can be made from the monomers shown.
O O
H O O H H O C C O H
Draw a diagram to show the repeat unit of Terylene.
[3]
[Total: 9]

631/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
7 Calcium chloride can be made by reacting calcium carbonate with hydrochloric acid.
CaCO3(s) + 2HCl (aq) → CaCl 2(aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)
An excess of calcium carbonate was added to 50.0 cm3 of 0.500 mol / dm3 hydrochloric acid. The
solution was filtered to remove the excess calcium carbonate.
(a) How many moles of HCl were used in this reaction?
..................................... mol [2]
(b) Deduce the number of moles of carbon dioxide gas made in this reaction.
..................................... mol [1]
(c) Calculate the mass of carbon dioxide made in this reaction.
........................................ g [2]
(d) Calculate the volume, in dm3, of carbon dioxide made in this reaction at room temperature and
pressure (r.t.p.).
.................................... dm3 [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/O/N/16

632/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13

633/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
8 Magnesium carbonate reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid.
MgCO3(s) + 2HCl (aq) → MgCl 2(aq) + H2O(l) + CO2(g)
An excess of magnesium carbonate pieces was added to dilute hydrochloric acid. The apparatus in
the diagram was used to measure the volume of gas produced. The total volume of gas collected
was recorded every 20 seconds.
bung
inverted
measuring cylinder
conical flask
dilute
hydrochloric water
magnesium carbonate
pieces acid trough
(a) The results obtained are shown on the graph.
120
100
80
total volume of
gas collected 60
/ cm3
40
20
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
time / s
(i) Describe how the rate of this reaction changed during the reaction. Explain why the rate
changed in this way.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/O/N/16

634/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
(ii) The experiment was repeated using the same mass of powdered magnesium carbonate
with the same volume and concentration of dilute hydrochloric acid.
Explain how the initial rate of reaction and total volume of gas collected would compare to
the first experiment.
initial rate of reaction ..........................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
total volume of gas .............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) A piece of magnesium ribbon was cleaned. The experiment was repeated using this clean
magnesium ribbon instead of magnesium carbonate.
Mg(s) + 2HCl (aq) → MgCl 2(aq) + H2(g)
This reaction is exothermic.

The rate of the reaction gradually increased over the first 2 minutes.
Explain why the rate of the reaction increased.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2016 0620/41/O/N/16

635/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2016
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
636/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/41/O/N/16
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*5182765417*
CHEMISTRY 0620/42
1 hour 15 minutes

IB16 11_0620_42/4RP
637/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 Particles behave differently when in different physical states.
(a) Solids have a fixed volume and a definite shape.

Gases have no fixed volume and ta e the shape of the container.
Describe the volume and shape of liquids.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Complete the table to show the separation, arrangement and movement of particles in each
physical state.
state separation of particles arrangement of particles movement of particles
solid
liquid touching one another randomly arranged move over one another
gas
[6]
(c) Name the following changes of state.
(i) Ice turning into water.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Solid carbon dioxide turning directly into gaseous carbon dioxide at room temperature.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16

638/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 This question is about atoms, ions and isotopes.
(a) Define the term nucleon number.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Give the electronic structure of the following atom and ion.
Na ..............................................................................................................................................
P3– ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State one medical use of radioactive isotopes.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) What is meant by the term relative atomic mass?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(e) Suggest why the relative atomic mass of chlorine is not a whole number.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

639/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
(f) Aluminium is a metal in Group III.
Describe the bonding in aluminium.

Include a labelled diagram and any appropriate charges in your answer.
[3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16

640/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
3 Clean, dry air contains a small amount of carbon dioxide.
(a) The percentages of the other gases present in clean, dry air are shown in the table.
Complete the table by inserting the names of these gases.
name of gas percentage present

78
21
1
[2]
(b) Oxides of nitrogen are atmospheric pollutants which can cause acid rain.
Describe the formation of oxides of nitrogen and suggest how they can cause acid rain.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Methane contributes to the greenhouse effect.
State two sources of methane.
1 .................................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Combustion and respiration add carbon dioxide to the atmosphere.
Name one natural process which removes carbon dioxide from the atmosphere.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

641/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 Dilute nitric acid behaves as a typical acid in some reactions but not in other reactions.
(a) Dilute nitric acid behaves as a typical acid when reacted with copper(II) oxide and with
copper(II) carbonate.
Describe what you would see if excess dilute nitric acid is added separately to solid samples
of copper(II) carbonate and copper(II) oxide followed by warming the mixtures.
copper(II) carbonate
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
copper(II) oxide
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) When dilute nitric acid is added to pieces of copper and heated, a reaction takes place and
copper(II) nitrate is formed.
(i) Part of the chemical equation for the reaction between copper and dilute nitric acid is
shown.
Complete the chemical equation by inserting the formula of copper(II) nitrate and balancing
the equation.
......Cu(s) + 8HNO3(aq) → .................................(aq) + 4H2O(l) + 2NO(g)

[2]
(ii) How is the reaction of dilute nitric acid with copper different from that of a typical metal with
a typical acid?
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16

642/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
5 Chlorine, bromine and iodine are halogens.
(a) Chlorine can be made in the laboratory by heating manganese(IV) oxide with concentrated
hydrochloric acid.
MnO2(s) + 4HCl (aq) → MnCl 2(aq) + 2H2O(l) + Cl 2(g)
Calculate the volume of 8.00 mol / dm3 HCl (aq) needed to react with 3.48 g of MnO2.
• moles of MnO2 used
................................ mol
• moles of HCl needed
................................ mol
• volume of HCl needed
................................ cm3
[4]
(b) A student bubbled chlorine gas into a test-tube containing aqueous potassium bromide.
(i) Describe the colour change seen in the test-tube.
from ............................................................... to ...............................................................

[2]
(ii) Complete the ionic equation for this reaction.
Cl 2(g) + ......Br –(aq) → ................ + ................

[3]

643/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
(c) When one mole of bromine, Br2, reacts with one mole of propene, one organic product is
formed.
(i) Which part of the propene molecule reacts with bromine?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) What is the name of the type of reaction which takes place between bromine and propene?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) When one mole of chlorine, Cl 2, reacts with one mole of propane, a mixture of two structural
isomers is formed.
(i) What is the name of the type of reaction which takes place between chlorine and propane?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain what is meant by the term structural isomers.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Draw the structure of two structural isomers formed when one mole of chlorine reacts with
one mole of propane.
[2]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16

644/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(e) Iodine forms an oxide which has the composition by mass: I, 76.0%; O, 24.0%.
(i) Use this information to determine the empirical formula of this oxide of iodine.
empirical formula ................................. [3]
(ii) The oxide of iodine in (e)(i) dissolves in water.
Predict and explain the effect of adding Universal Indicator to an aqueous solution of this
oxide of iodine.
effect on Universal Indicator ...............................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 21]

645/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 Aluminium is a very important metal.
Aluminium is extracted from its ore, bauxite, by electrolysis. Bauxite is an impure form of aluminium
oxide, Al 2O3.
(a) Describe how aluminium is extracted from bauxite. Include an ionic half-equation for the
reaction at each electrode.
description .................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
ionic half-equation for the anode reaction .................................................................................
ionic half-equation for the cathode reaction................................................................................

[5]
(b) Explain why the anodes have to be replaced regularly.
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Give two uses of aluminium and give a reason why aluminium is suitable for each use.
use 1 ..........................................................................................................................................
reason ........................................................................................................................................
use 2 ..........................................................................................................................................
reason ........................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16

646/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11

647/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
7 Proteins are a major constituent of food.
Proteins are polymers.
(a) What is a polymer?
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Proteins can be converted into amino acids.
(i) Name the type of chemical reaction which occurs when proteins are converted into amino
acids.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest a condition needed to convert proteins into amino acids.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A colourless mixture of amino acids was separated by chromatography.

Amino acid X has an Rf value of 0.8.
The chromatogram of the mixture after treatment with a locating agent is shown.
solvent front
baseline
(i) How is an Rf value calculated?
Rf =
[1]
(ii) On the diagram put a ring around the spot caused by amino acid X. [1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16

648/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(iii) Describe how you would perform a chromatography experiment to produce the
chromatogram shown in (c). Assume you have been given the mixture of amino acids and
a suitable locating agent. You are provided with common laboratory apparatus.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]

649/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
(d) When one molecule of an amino acid A combines with one molecule of another amino acid B,
two different dipeptide molecules could be formed.
Draw the structures of the two different dipeptide molecules.

Show all of the atoms and all of the bonds in the linkages.
amino acid A amino acid B
H O H O
N C N C
H O H H O H
[3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16

650/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0620/42/O/N/16

651/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2016
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
16
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
652/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/42/O/N/16
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*0906632911*
CHEMISTRY 0620/43
1 hour 15 minutes

IB16 11_0620_43/4RP
653/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 (a) Complete the table.
particle charge relative mass
proton +1
neutron 1
electron
[2]
(b) The following are isotopes of carbon.

12 13 14
6C 6C 6C
(i) In terms of numbers of protons, neutrons and electrons, how are these three isotopes the
same and how are they different?
They are the same because ...............................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
They are different because .................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Why do all isotopes of carbon have the same chemical properties?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Name two forms of the element carbon which have giant covalent structures.
.............................................................. and ........................................................................ [1]
(d) Complete the diagram to show the electron arrangement in a carbon dioxide molecule.
Show the outer shell electrons only.
O C O
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/O/N/16

654/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 Beryllium is a metallic element in Group II.
(a) Give the electronic structure of a beryllium atom.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Give the formula of beryllium oxide.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) (i) Describe the bonding in a metallic element such as beryllium.

Include a labelled diagram and any appropriate charges in your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain why metallic elements, such as beryllium, are good conductors of electricity.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Beryllium hydroxide is amphoteric.

Beryllium hydroxide reacts with acids. The salts formed contain positive beryllium ions.
(i) Give the formula of the positive beryllium ion.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between beryllium hydroxide and
hydrochloric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Beryllium hydroxide also reacts with alkalis. The salts formed contain beryllate ions,
BeO22–.
Suggest a chemical equation for the reaction between beryllium hydroxide and
sodium hydroxide solution.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]

655/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 When lead(II) nitrate is heated, two gases are given off and solid lead(II) oxide remains.
2Pb(NO3)2(s) → 2PbO(s) + 4NO2(g) + O2(g)
(a) Calculate the Mr of lead(II) nitrate.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) 6.62 g of lead(II) nitrate are heated until there is no further change in mass.
(i) Calculate the mass of lead(II) oxide produced.
........................... g [2]
(ii) Calculate the volume of oxygen, O2, produced at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
........................... dm3 [2]
(c) Describe a test for oxygen.
test .............................................................................................................................................
result ..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/O/N/16

656/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
(d) Lead(II) oxide is insoluble. A student adds solid lead(II) oxide to dilute nitric acid until the
lead(II) oxide is in excess. Aqueous lead(II) nitrate and water are produced.
(i) What is meant by the term excess?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) How would the student know when the lead(II) oxide is in excess?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

657/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 Silicon(IV) oxide and sodium chloride have different types of bonding and structure.
(a) Name the type of bonding present in
silicon(IV) oxide, .......................................................................................................................
sodium chloride. ........................................................................................................................

[2]
(b) Name the type of structure present in silicon(IV) oxide.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) (i) Silicon(IV) oxide has a high melting point. Explain why.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Silicon(IV) oxide is a poor conductor of electricity. Explain why.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Solid sodium chloride does not conduct electricity. However, it conducts electricity when molten.
Explain why solid sodium chloride does not conduct electricity, whereas molten sodium chloride
does conduct electricity.
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(e) A concentrated aqueous solution of sodium chloride is electrolysed using carbon electrodes.
(i) Name the products formed at the electrodes.
product at the positive electrode (anode) ...........................................................................
product at the negative electrode (cathode) .......................................................................

[2]
(ii) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the negative electrode.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/O/N/16

658/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(f) A dilute aqueous solution of sodium chloride is electrolysed using carbon electrodes.
Name the main product formed at the positive electrode.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(g) Molten sodium chloride is electrolysed using carbon electrodes.
(i) Name the product formed at the negative electrode.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction occurring at the negative electrode.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Chlorine is produced at the positive electrode.
Give the test for chlorine.
test ......................................................................................................................................
result ...................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 17]

659/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 Sulfuric acid can be manufactured from the raw materials sulfur, air and water. The process can be
divided into four stages.
stage 1 converting sulfur into sulfur dioxide

stage 2 converting sulfur dioxide into sulfur trioxide
stage 3 converting sulfur trioxide into oleum, H2S2O7
stage 4 converting oleum into sulfuric acid
stage 1
(a) (i) Describe how sulfur is converted into sulfur dioxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the conversion of sulfur into sulfur dioxide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
stage 2
(b) Sulfur dioxide is converted into sulfur trioxide according to the following equation.
2SO2 + O2 2SO3
The reaction is carried out at a temperature of 450 °C and a pressure of 1–2 atmospheres
using a catalyst. The energy change, H, for the reaction is –196 kJ / mol.
(i) What is the meaning of the symbol ?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the catalyst used in this reaction.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Why is a catalyst used?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) If a temperature higher than 450 °C were used, what would happen to the amount of
sulfur trioxide produced? Give a reason for your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(v) Suggest a reason why a temperature lower than 450 °C is not used.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/O/N/16

660/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
(vi) If a pressure higher than 1–2 atmospheres were used, what would happen to the amount
of sulfur trioxide produced? Give a reason for your answer.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
stage 3
(c) (i) What is added to sulfur trioxide to convert it into oleum?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the conversion of sulfur trioxide into oleum.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
stage 4
(d) (i) What is added to oleum to convert it into sulfuric acid?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write a chemical equation for the conversion of oleum into sulfuric acid.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Give one use of sulfuric acid.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(f) Sulfuric acid reacts with a hydrocarbon called benzene to produce benzenesulfonic acid,
C6H5SO3H. Benzenesulfonic acid is a strong acid which ionises to produce hydrogen ions, H+,
and benzenesulfonate ions, C6H5SO3–.
(i) What is meant by the term strong acid?
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how to show that a 1 mol / dm3 solution of benzenesulfonic acid is a strong acid.
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Write a chemical equation for the reaction between benzenesulfonic acid and
sodium carbonate, Na2CO3.
....................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 20]

661/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 Synthetic polyamides are made by condensation polymerisation.
(a) (i) What is meant by the term condensation polymerisation?
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Name another type of polymerisation.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) One repeat unit of a synthetic polyamide is represented by the following structure.
O O
C C N N
H H
(i) Draw a ring around the amide link. [1]
(ii) Complete the diagrams to show the structures of the monomers used to produce the
synthetic polyamide. Show all the missing atoms and bonds.
C C N N
[2]
(iii) Name an example of a synthetic polyamide.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Proteins and synthetic polyamides have similarities and differences.
(i) Name the type of compounds that are the monomers used to make up proteins.
....................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/O/N/16

662/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(ii) Starting with a sample of protein, describe how to produce, separate, detect and identify
the monomers which make it up.
Your answer should include

• the name of the process used to break down the protein into its monomers,
• the name of the process used to separate the monomers,
• the method used to detect the monomers after they have been separated,
• the method used to identify the monomers after they have been separated.
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2016 0620/43/O/N/16

663/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
Group
© UCLES 2016
1 2
H He
hydrogen helium
Key 1 4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
23 24 27 28 31 32 35.5 40
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
12
85 88 89 91 93 96 – 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
664/684
55 56 57–71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
0620/43/O/N/16
lanthanoids
133 137 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209 – – –
87 88 89–103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 116
actinoids
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
139 140 141 144 – 150 152 157 159 163 165 167 169 173 175
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
– 232 231 238 – – – – – – – – – – –
2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
*0123456789*
CHEMISTRY 0620/04
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) For Examination from 2016
SPECIMEN PAPER
1 hour 15 minutes
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.

The syllabus is accredited for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
665/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

2
1 The following table gives information about six substances.

substance
/ °C / °C as a solid as a liquid
A 839 1484 good good
B –188 –42 poor poor
C 776 1497 poor good
D –117 78 poor poor
E 1607 2227 poor poor
F –5 102 poor good
(a) Which substance could be a metal?
[1]
(b) State all the substances that are liquid at room temperature?
[1]
(c) Which substance could have a macromolecular structure similar to that of silicon(IV) oxide?
[1]
(d) Which substance could be propane?
[1]
(e) Which substance could be sodium chloride?
[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

666/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
3
2 The table gives the composition of three particles.

particle
A 15 15 16
B 15 18 16
C 15 15 17
(a) What is the evidence in the table for each of the following?
(i) Particle A is an atom.
[1]
(ii) A, B and C are all particles of the same element.
[1]
(iii) Particles A and C are isotopes of the same element.
[2]
(b) (i) What is the electronic structure of particle A?
[1]
(ii) Is element A, a metal or a non-metal? Give a reason for your choice.
[1]
[Total: 6]

667/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
4
3 Kinetic theory explains the properties of matter in terms of the arrangement and movement of
particles.
(a) Nitrogen is a gas at room temperature. Nitrogen molecules, N2, are spread far apart and
move in a random manner at high speed.
(i) Draw the electronic structure of a nitrogen molecule.

Show only the outer electron shells.
[2]
(ii) Compare the movement and arrangement of the molecules in solid nitrogen to those in
nitrogen gas.
[3]
(b) A sealed container contains nitrogen gas. The pressure of the gas is due to the molecules of
the gas hitting the walls of the container.
Use the kinetic theory to explain why the pressure inside the container increases when the
temperature is increased.
[2]
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

668/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
5
The following apparatus can be used to measure the rate of diffusion of a gas.
constant
pressure
applied metal foil,
gas escapes
gas syringe gas through small
hole in foil
The following results were obtained.
temperature rate of diffusion

gas
/ °C in cm3 / min
nitrogen 25 1.00
chlorine 25 0.63
nitrogen 50 1.05
(c) (i) Explain why nitrogen gas diffuses faster than chlorine gas.
[2]
(ii) Explain why the nitrogen gas diffuses faster at the higher temperature.
[1]
[Total: 10]

669/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
6
4 Chromium is a transition element.
(a) (i) State two differences in the physical properties of chromium and sodium.
[2]
(ii) State two differences in the chemical properties of chromium and sodium.
[2]
(b) Chromium is used to electroplate steel objects. The diagram shows how this could be done.
+ –
lead anode object to

be plated
chromium(III)
sulfate(aq)
(i) Give two reasons why steel objects are plated with chromium.
[2]
(ii) The formula of the chromium(III) ion is Cr3+ and of the sulfate ion is SO42–. Give the
formula of chromium(III) sulfate.
[1]
(iii) Write the ionic half-equation for the reaction at the negative electrode (cathode).
[2]
(iv) A colourless gas, which relights a glowing splint, is formed at the positive electrode
(anode).
State the name of this gas.
[1]
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

670/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
7
(v) During electroplating, it is necessary to add more chromium(III) sulfate but during
copper plating using a copper anode, it is not necessary to add more copper(II) sulfate.
Explain this difference.
[2]
[Total: 12]

671/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
8
5 Iron is extracted from its ore, hematite, in the blast furnace.
waste gases
raw materials::
coke, C
iron ore, Fe2O3
firebrick lining limestone, CaCO3
air
slag
molten iron
Describe the reactions involved in this extraction.
Include one equation for a redox reaction and one for an acid/base reaction.
[5]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

672/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
9
BLANK PAGE

673/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
10
6 Soluble salts can be made using a base and an acid.
(a) Complete this method of preparing dry crystals of the soluble salt
cobalt(II) chloride-6-water from the insoluble base cobalt(II) carbonate.
step 1
Add an excess of cobalt(II) carbonate to hot dilute hydrochloric acid.
step 2
step 3
step 4
[4]
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

674/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
11
(b) (i) 5.95 g of cobalt(II) carbonate were added to 40 cm3 of hydrochloric acid, concentration
2.0 mol / dm3.
Calculate the maximum yield of cobalt(II) chloride-6-water and show that the cobalt(II)
carbonate was in excess.
CoCO3 + 2HCl → CoCl2 + CO2 + H2O
CoCl2 + 6H2O → CoCl2.6H2O
maximum yield:
number of moles of HCl used = ………………………………………………...…..…….
number of moles of CoCl2 formed = ……………………………………………..….……
number of moles of CoCl2.6H2O formed = ………………………………………..…..…
mass of one mole of CoCl2.6H2O = 238 g
maximum yield of CoCl2.6H2O = …………………………………………………..…..… g
to show that cobalt(II) carbonate is in excess:
number of moles of HCl used = ……………………….……… (use your value from above)
mass of one mole of CoCO3 = 119 g
number of moles of CoCO3 in 5.95 g of cobalt(II) carbonate = ………………………… [5]
(ii) Explain how these calculations show that cobalt(II) carbonate is in excess.
[1]
[Total: 10]

675/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
12
7 Iodine reacts with chlorine to form dark brown iodine monochloride.
I2 + Cl2 → 2ICl
This reacts with more chlorine to give yellow iodine trichloride.

An equilibrium forms between these iodine chlorides.
ICl(l) + Cl2(g) =! ICl3(s)

dark brown yellow
(a) What do you understand by the term equilibrium?
[2]
(b) When the equilibrium mixture is heated, it becomes a darker brown colour.
Suggest if the reverse reaction is endothermic or exothermic. Give a reason for your choice.
[1]
(c) The pressure on the equilibrium mixture is decreased.
(i) How would this affect the position of equilibrium? Give a reason for your choice.
It would move to the
reason
[1]
(ii) Describe what you would observe.
[1]
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

676/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
13
(d) Calculate the overall energy change for the reaction between iodine and chlorine using the
bond energy values shown.
I2 + Cl2 → 2ICl
Bond Energy / kJ per mol
I–I 151
Cl – Cl 242
I – Cl 208
Show your working.
[3]
(e) Draw a labelled energy level diagram for the reaction between iodine and chlorine using the
information in (d).
[2]
[Total: 10]

677/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
14
8 The alcohols form an homologous series.
(a) Give three characteristics of an homologous series.
[3]
(b) The following two alcohols are members of an homologous series and they are isomers.
CH3 ― CH2 ― CH2 ― CH2 ― OH and (CH3)2CH ― CH2 ― OH
(i) Explain why they are isomers.
[2]
(ii) Deduce the structural formula of another alcohol which is also an isomer of these
alcohols.
[1]
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

678/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
15
(c) Copper(II) oxide can oxidise butanol to liquid X, whose pH is 4.
mineral wool
soaked in butanol copper(II) oxide
heat
liquid X
formed by
oxidation of
butanol.
(i) Give the name of another reagent which can oxidise butanol.
[1]
(ii) Which homologous series does liquid X belong to?
[1]
(iii) State the formula of liquid X.
[1]

679/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
16
(d) The alcohol ethanol can be made by fermentation. Yeast is added to aqueous glucose.
C6H12O6(aq) → 2C2H5OH(aq) + 2CO2(g)
Carbon dioxide is given off and the mixture becomes warm, as the reaction is exothermic.
The graph shows how the rate of reaction varies over several days.
rate of
reaction
time
(i) Suggest a method of measuring the rate of this reaction.
[2]
(ii) Why does the rate initially increase?
[1]
(iii) Suggest two reasons why the rate eventually decreases.
[2]
[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

680/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
17
BLANK PAGE

681/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
18
9 There are two types of polymerisation, addition and condensation.
(a) Explain the difference between these two types of polymerisation.
[2]
(b) Some plastics, formed by polymerisation, are non-biodegradable.
Describe two pollution problems that are caused by non-biodegradable plastics.
[2]
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

682/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
19
(c) The polymer known as PVA is used in paints and adhesives. Its structural formula is shown
below.
―CH2―CH―CH2―CH―
│ │
OCOCH3 OCOCH3
Deduce the structural formula of its monomer.
[1]
(d) A condensation polymer can be made from the following monomers.
HOOC(CH2)4COOH and H2N(CH2)6NH2
Draw the structural formula of this polymer.
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

683/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP
20
© UCLES 2014 0620/04/SP/16

684/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

Chemistry 0620 Past Papers Paper4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chemistry 0620 Past Papers Paper4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chemistry 0620 Past Papers Paper4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cambridge

October/November 2020 Variant 3 ---------------------209

SPECIMEN PAPER 1 hour 15 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

1/684 2023-2016 Paper 4 QP

1 Element X can undergo the following physical changes.

State one other difference between boiling and evaporation.

Write a symbol equation for this reaction.

2 Magnesium, calcium and strontium are Group II elements.

shell 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

(b) Describe how the electronic configuration of a strontium atom is:

(i) similar to the electronic configuration of a calcium atom

(ii) different from the electronic configuration of a calcium atom.

(c) Calcium reacts with cold water to form two products:

(i) Name gas P.

(ii) Identify the ion responsible for making solution Q alkaline.

(iii) Suggest the pH of solution Q.

© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23 [Turn over

(d) Magnesium reacts with chlorine to form magnesium chloride, MgCl .

Magnesium chloride is an ionic compound.

Show the charges on the ions.

Fig. 2.1 [3]

(e) Aqueous silver nitrate is added to aqueous magnesium chloride.

A white precipitate forms.

Write an ionic equation for this reaction. Include state symbols.

© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

3 Copper is a transition element. It has variable oxidation states.

(b) When copper(II

Explain in terms of changes in oxidation numbers why this is a redox reaction.

change in oxidation number of copper: from …………… to ……………

change in oxidation number of oxygen: from …………… to ……………

© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23 [Turn over

State why this displacement reaction takes place.

© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

4 Sulfuric acid has many uses.

(a) Sulfuric acid is a strong acid.

(i) Define the term acid.

(ii) Define the term strong acid.

(b) Dilute sulfuric acid is used to make salts known as sulfates.

step 2 Filter the mixture.

(ii) State why it is important to add an excess of zinc carbonate in step 1.

(iii) Define the term saturated solution.

© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23 [Turn over

The reaction is shown by the equation.

2NaOH + H2SO4 → Na2SO4 + 2H2O

(i) State the colour of methyl orange in aqueous sodium hydroxide.

• Calculate the number of moles of aqueous sodium hydroxide added to the

© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23 [Turn over

(iii) Deduce the time at which the reaction finishes.

© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23

All other conditions are kept the same.

(i) Define the term activation energy.

© UCLES 2020 0620/04/SP/23 [Turn over

6 Alkynes and alkenes are homologous series of unsaturated hydrocarbons.

(i) Give two other characteristics of members of a homologous series.

(ii) Deduce the general formula of alkynes.